13011.SMD Index No. 44208 Department of Technology ... · General Services Building – Restroom...

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13) General Services Building – Restroom Renovation and ACU 9&10 Replacement File No. 071/13011.SMD

State of Michigan Department of Technology, Management and Budget

Facilities and Business Services Administration

DCSPEC Bidding and Contract Document

Minor Projects

File No. 071/13011.SMD Index No. 44208

Department of Technology, Management & Budget General Services Building – Restroom Renovation

And ACU 9&10 Replacement

October 10, 2014

Prepared By: William A. Kibbe & Associates, Inc.

1475 S. Washington Ave. Saginaw, MI 48601 Ph# 989-752-5000

Project Engineer: Chris Miller, P.E., C.E.M.


DTMB-0401D (R 11/13)

BID SUMMARY DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET

SUBMIT BID TO: OVERNIGHT MAIL TO: Linda Feldpausch Linda Feldpausch FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION DIVISION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION DIVISION P.O. Box 30026 General Office Building, 3B Lansing, Michigan 48909 7150 Harris Drive Dimondale, Michigan 48821

FILE NUMBER 071/13011.SMD

INDEX NUMBER 44208

DEPARTMENT/AGENCY Department of Technology, Management & Budget

CONTRACT TIME(S) 180 Days

PROJECT NAME General Services Building – Restroom Renovation and ACU 9&10 Replacement

LOCATION Dimondale, MI

BID OPENING DATE October 29, 2014 at 2:00 pm Local Time

FOR AN EXAMINATION OF THE SITE CONTACT: Mr. Scott Davis, Facilities Supervisor 9517-636-0520

SEE SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AND SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PROVIDED WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS. BID: WE PROPOSE TO FURNISH, PERFORM AND COMPLETE THE ENTIRE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IN CONSIDERATION OF THE BID PRICE (S) STATED BELOW.

FIRM NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS TELEPHONE NUMBER and E-MAIL ADDRESS

□ Qualified Disabled Veteran

FEDERAL I.D. NUMBER

(protected information required for processing payments)

BIDDER'S SIGNATURE AND TITLE DATE

WITNESS' SIGNATURE DATE

By signing this bid above, bidder certifies their enclosed Qualified Disabled Veteran and Michigan-Based Business Certifications.

BASE BID FROM BID SCHEDULE (Include specified Allowances): ____________________________________________________________________________Dollars $____________________ (use words) (in figures) Alternate1: (Add/Subtract) ______________________________________________________ Dollars $ ____________________ (use words) (in figures) Contingency: Dollars $ 45,000______________ (in figures) Total Base Bid (Including Contingency) _____________________________________________Dollars $ ____________________ (use words) (in figures) Builders Risk Insurance is NOT provided if marked.

A PERFORMANCE BOND AND A PAYMENT BOND ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL BIDS OVER $50,000.00. EACH BID MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A FIVE (5) PERCENT BID GUARANTEE.

BIDDERS ARE ALSO CAUTIONED TO FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH ALL OF THE OTHER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT.

Project Scope of Work: The General Services building has a print room on the north side of the building which is currently conditioned via (2) grade mounted, air cooled, air handling units. The current system has zero redundancy and is at the end of its useful life. The grade mounted units will be replaced with (2) new units mounted indoors on a mezzanine in the north east corner of the print room. Each of the (2) new units are sized to accommodate 100% load during peak heating or cooling providing 100% redundancy. The print room currently has 2x4 suspended ceiling grid at 12’ above finished floor. The ceiling, lights, fire alarm, and fire suppression will need to be modified to accommodate the new mezzanine and equipment.

After the addition of the west restroom group in the 90’s the sanitary piping was broken due to settling which resulted in backups and blockages. A sanitary pump station was added specifically for this restroom group as a temporary fix in order to maintain


usage of the facilities. A new sanitary system lateral will be installed on the north side of the building to convey waste from the west restroom group to the sanitary main on the east side of the building. The existing restroom sanitary will need to be exposed, repaired, and rerouted out the north end wall to tie in to the new sanitary lateral.

The Bidder must figure its Base Bid on the specified, or Addendum-approved, materials and equipment only. No “or equal” or substitution proposals will be permitted after Bid opening, except as provided in the General Conditions.

Addenda: Bidder acknowledges receipt of Addenda: No. ___ dated: ____, No. ___ dated: ______No. ___ dated: _______

FIRM NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER and E-MAIL ADDRESS

BID SCHEDULE

Base Bid Schedule - The Bidder will complete the Work and accept as full payment, for the Work items listed, the following Unit Prices and/or Item Bid Prices, as applicable:

Base Bid Bid Description Unit Item Bid Item No. Quantity (Bidder to write price in words) Price Price

Base Bid (Sum of Item Bid Prices for all Base Bid Items):

__________________________________________________________________ Dollars $__________________________ (use words) (in figures)

Schedule of Alternates - The Bidder will complete (or deduct from the Contract) the parts of the Work designated by the Alternates that follow and accept in full payment (or allow in full credit) for those parts of the Work the following Item Bid Prices:

Alternate Bid Description Unit Item Bid Item No. Quantity (Bidder to write price in words) Price Price

No.1 No. 2 No. 3 The Bidder further acknowledges and agrees that the separate prices bid on this “Schedule of Alternates,” where they are applicable and deemed acceptable by the Owner, will be used if incorporated into the Contract when the Owner issues the Notice of Award.


R 2/13 DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET

Facilities and Business Services Administration Design & Construction Division

Qualified Disabled Veteran (QDV) Business Representation

‘Qualified Disabled Veteran,’ means a business entity that is 51% or more owned by one or more veterans with a service-connected disability. ‘Qualified Disabled,’ means a business entity that is 51% or more owned by one or more with a service-connected disability. The vendor represents that it IS _____, a qualified disabled veteran. The contractor represents and warrants that the company meets the above (when checked) and has attached supporting documentation per the following: Each bid requesting the Qualified Disabled Veterans (QDV) preference, in accordance with Public Act 22 of 2010, MCL 18.1241.3 shall include a DD214 Proof of Service and Discharge, a Veterans Administration rating decision letter, proof of disability (if the disability is not indicated on the DD214), and appropriate legal documents setting forth the 51% natural persons QDV ownership.

Fraudulent Certification as a Qualified Disabled Veteran may result in debarment under MCL 18.264.

Certification of a Michigan Based Business

(Information Required Prior to Contract Award for Application of State Reciprocity Provisions) To qualify as a Michigan Based Business: Vendor must have, during the 12 months immediately preceding this bid deadline: or If the business is newly established, for the period the business has been in existence, it has: (check all that apply):

Filed a Michigan single business tax return showing a portion or all of the income tax base allocated or

apportioned to the State of Michigan pursuant to the Michigan Single Business Tax Act, 1975 PA 228, MCL 208.1 – 208.145; or

Filed a Michigan income tax return showing income generated in or attributed to the State of Michigan; or Withheld Michigan income tax from compensation paid to the bidder’s owners and remitted the tax to the

Department of Treasury; or

I certify that I have personal knowledge of such filing or withholding, that it was more than a nominal filing for the purpose of gaining the status of a Michigan business, and that it indicates a significant business presence in the state, considering the size of the business and the nature of its activities.

I authorize the Michigan Department of Treasury to verify that the business has or has not met the criteria for a Michigan business indicated above and to disclose the verifying information to the procuring agency.

Bidder shall also indicate one of the following:

Bidder qualifies as a Michigan business (provide zip code: ________________)

Bidder does not qualify as a Michigan business (provide name of State: _____________). Principal place of business is outside the State of Michigan, however service/commodity provided by a location

within the State of Michigan (provide zip code: (___________).

Fraudulent Certification as a Michigan business is prohibited by MCL 18.1268 § 268. A BUSINESS THAT PURPOSELY OR WILLFULLY SUBMITS A FALSE CERTIFICATION THAT IT IS A MICHIGAN BUSINESS OR FALSELY INDICATES THE STATE IN WHICH IT HAS ITS PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS IS GUILTY OF A FELONY, PUNISHABLE BY A FINE OF NOT LESS THAN $25,000 and subject to debarment under MCL 18.264.


BID BOND BID SUBMITTED ON the _______ day of ________________, 20____.

Bid Security is in the form of: a Bid Bond _______ Bid Bond form has been duly executed _______; or

A Bank Certified or Cashier's check ___ or Money Order ___ is attached to this page ____

If the Bidder is an Individual:

Name of Individual: _________________________________________________________

Name & Title of Person Authorized to sign: ___________________________________________

Signature: _________________________________________________________ (If not the Individual, Attach Power of Attorney) Date

Doing Business as: _________________________________________________________

Business Address: _________________________________________________________

County of registration _________________________

Telephone: _________________________ FAX: ______________________

If the Bidder is a Partnership:

By: _________________________________________________________ (True Name of the Partnership)

_________________________________________________________ Partner Authorized to Sign Date

Signature: _________________________________________________________ (Attach evidence of Authority to sign) Date


County of registration _________________________

Telephone: _________________________ FAX _______________________

If the Bidder is a Corporation:

By: _________________________________________________________ (Legal Corporation Name)

Name & Title of Authorized Officer: __________________________________________________

Signature: _________________________________________________________ (Attach evidence of Authority to sign) Date

Name & Title of Officer Attesting: __________________________________________________ Signature: _________________________________________________________ Date


Telephone: _________________________ FAX _______________________

(State of Incorporation): _________________________________________________________

If The Bidder is A Joint Venture: JOINT VENTURE SIGNATURES MUST BE AS PROVIDED IN INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. EACH JOINT VENTURER SIGNING THE BID MUST SIGN IN THE MANNER INDICATED FOR AN INDIVIDUAL, A PARTNERSHIP OR A CORPORATION. IF MORE THAN TWO JOINT VENTURERS OF THE SAME TYPE ARE INCLUDED, USE ADDITIONAL PAGES. JOINT VENTURE STATE OF INCORPORATION ___________________ OR COUNTY OF REGISTRATION _____________________


POST-BID SUBMITTALS The PSC will request this submittal after bid opening. Complete and submit these items within two

business days after the request. BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE MODIFICATION RATING (EMR) ____________ Attach letter of explanation if the Bidder does not have an EMR. PROPOSED PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT _______________________________ Attach brief resume or list of similar successful projects. LIST OF SIMILAR PROJECTS COMPLETED BY THE BIDDER Please list at least three completed projects of similar size and complexity to the project being bid, with reference contact information ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ REFERENCE #___ Owner: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________

Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ REFERENCE #___ Owner: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________


____________________________________________________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ REFERENCE #___ Owner: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________


____________________________________________________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________


PERFORMANCE BOND SURETY COMPANY REFERENCE No. __________________________________

That "the Contractor," ___________________________________________________, a corporation ___, individual ___, partnership ___, joint venture ___ of the State of __________________, qualified to do business in the State of Michigan, as Principal, and "the Surety," ____________________________________________________________________, of the State of _________________, as surety, are held and bound unto the State of Michigan, "the Owner," as Obligee, in the amount of __________________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and assigns, jointly and severally, in compliance with 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.

The Contractor has entered into "the Contract" with the Owner for _______________________________________________ _______________, "the Work," covered by the Contract Documents, which are incorporated into this Performance Bond by this reference;

If the Contractor faithfully performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, warranties, indemnifications and agreements of the Contract Documents within the Contract Time (including any authorized changes, with or without notice to the Surety) and during the Correction Period, and if the Contractor also performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, warranties, indemnifications and agreements of any and all duly authorized modifications of the Contract Documents, then THIS OBLIGATION IS VOID, OTHERWISE TO REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT.

A. No change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision) releases the Surety of its obligations under this Section 00610 Performance Bond. The Surety expressly waives notice of any such change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or

modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision).

B. This Performance Bond must be solely for the protection of the Owner and its successors, legal representatives or assigns.

C. It is the intention of the Contractor and Surety that they must be bound by all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to General Conditions and this Performance Bond). However, this Performance Bond is executed pursuant to 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq., and if any provision(s) of this Performance Bond is/are illegal, invalid or unenforceable, all other provisions of this Performance Bond must nevertheless remain in full force and effect, and the Owner must be protected to the full extent provided by 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.

IMPORTANT: The Surety must be authorized to do business in the State of Michigan by the Department of Licensing and Regulatory Affairs − Insurance Bureau, must be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570, and, unless otherwise authorized by the Owner in writing, must have at least an A− Best's rating and a Class VII or better financial size category per current A. M. Best Company ratings.

Name, Address and Telephone of the Surety:

Address and Telephone of Agent, who is either a resident of, or whose principal office is maintained in, the State of Michigan

Signed and sealed this __________ day of _______________________, 20_____.

THE CONTRACTOR: (Print Full Name and Sign) By:___________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________ Name & Title: __________________________________________________

Telephone No. _________________________________________________

THE SURETY: (Print Full Name and Sign) Agent: ________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________ Attorney-in-Fact: ________________________________________________

Telephone No. _______________________________________________


PAYMENT BOND

SURETY COMPANY REFERENCE No.___________________________________

"the Contractor," ___________________________________________________, a corporation ___, individual ___, partnership ___, joint venture ___ of the State of __________________, qualified to do business in the State of Michigan, as Principal, and "the Surety," ____________________________________________________________________, of the State of _________________, as surety, are held and bound unto the State of Michigan, "the Owner," as Obligee, in the amount of __________________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and assigns, jointly and severally, in compliance with 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.

The Contractor has entered into "the Contract" with the Owner for _____________________________________________ __________________, "the Work," covered by the Contract Documents, which are incorporated into this Payment Bond by this reference;

If the Contractor promptly pays all claimants supplying labor or materials to the Contractor or to the Contractor's Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work, then THIS OBLIGATION IS VOID, OTHERWISE TO REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT.

A. All rights and remedies on this Payment Bond are solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials to the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work, and must be determined in accordance with Michigan Law.

B. No change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision) must release the Surety of its obligations under this Payment Bond. The Surety

hereby expressly waives notice of any such change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision).

C. It is the intention of the Contractor and Surety that they must be bound by all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to this Payment Bond). However, this Payment Bond is executed pursuant to 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq., and if any provision(s) of this Payment Bond is/are illegal, invalid or unenforceable, all other provisions of this Payment Bond must nevertheless remain in full force and effect, and the Owner must be protected to the full extent provided by 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.

IMPORTANT: The Surety must be authorized to do business in the State of Michigan by the Department of Licensing and Regulatory Affairs − Insurance Bureau, must be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570, and, unless otherwise authorized by the Owner in writing, must have at least an A− Best's rating and a Class VII or better financial size category per current A. M. Best Company ratings.

Name, Address and Telephone of the Surety:

Address and Telephone of Agent, who is either a resident of, or whose principal office is maintained in, the State of Michigan

Signed and sealed this __________ day of _______________________, 20_____.

THE CONTRACTOR: (Print Full Name and Sign) By:___________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________ Name & Title: __________________________________________________

Telephone No. _________________________________________________

THE SURETY: (Print Full Name and Sign) Agent: ________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________ Attorney-in-Fact: ________________________________________________

Telephone No. ____________________________________________________


TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTRACT FORMS BID SUMMARY FORM BID SCHEDULE QUALIFIED DISABLED VETERAN (QDV) BUSINESS REPRESENTATION CERTIFICATION OF A MICHIGAN BASED BUSINESS RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATION BID BOND POST-BID SUBMITTALS PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS SECTION TITLE PAGES THRU 00010 PRE-BID INFORMATION 00-1 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00-2 TO 00-6 00120 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS 00-6 00200 INFORMATION TO BIDDERS 00-7 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00-7 TO 00-18 00750 SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS 00-18 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00-19 00850 WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE 00-19 00900 ADDENDA 00-19 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01-1 01020 ALLOWANCES 01-1 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01-1 TO 01-2 01030 ALTERNATES 01-2 01040 COORDINATION 01-2 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 01-2 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01-2 TO 01-4 01090 REFERENCES 01-4 01100 PROJECT PROCEDURES 01-5 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01-5 01300 SUBMITTALS 01-5 TO 01-6 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01-6 TO 01-7 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01-7 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01-7 TO 01-8 01650 FACILITY START-UP 01-8 01700 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT 01-8 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-1 TO 024119-5 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 TO 033000-X DIVISION 05 – METALS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1 TO 051200-X 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 TO 055000-X 055119 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119-1 TO 055119-X 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213-1 TO 055213-X 055313 BAR GRATINGS 055313-1 TO 055313-X


DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 074213.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13-1 TO 074213.13-6 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-1 TO 092216-4 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900-1 TO 092900-3 099123 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTING 099123-1 TO 099123-5 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517-1 TO 220517-3 220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518-1 TO 220518-2 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-1 TO 220529-5 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553-1 TO 220553-2 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-1 TO 221316-8 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-1 TO 221319-3 DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230130.51 HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING 230130.51-1 TO 230130.51-3 230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517-1 TO 230517-3 230518 EXCUTHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518-1 TO 230518-2 230523.12 BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.12-1 TO 230523.12-4 230523.14 CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.14-1 TO 230523.14-5 230523.15 GATE VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.15-1 TO 230523.15-4 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-1 TO 230529-8 230548.13 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548.13-1 TO 230548.13-5 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-1 TO 230553-4 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-1 TO 230593-12 230713 DUCT INSULATION 230713-1 TO 230713-9 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719-1 TO 230719-13 230923.11 CONTROL VALVES 230923.11-1 TO 230923.11-11 230923.12 CONTROL DAMPERS 230923.12-1 TO 230923.12-9 230993.11 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC 230993.11-1 TO 230993.11-3 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-1 TO 232113-9 232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116-1 TO 232116-6 232216 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES 232216-1 TO 232216-5 233713 METAL DUCTS 233113-1 TO 233113-10 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1 TO 233300-7 233113 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-1 TO 233713-2 234300 ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS 234300-1 TO 234300-4 237313 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313-1 TO 237313-6 238413 HUMIDIFIERS 238413-1 TO 238413-4 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-1 TO 260519-3 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-1 TO 260526-3 260529 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-1 TO 260529-4 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1 TO 260533-5 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544-1 TO 260544-3 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260553-1 TO 260553-4 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262726-1 TO 262726-4 262813 FUSES 262813-1 TO 262813-2 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-1 TO 262816-3 265119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119-1 TO 265119-3 265219 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219-1 TO 265219-4 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111-1 TO 283111-9


DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 311000 SITE CLEARING 311000-1 TO 311000-3 312000 EARTH MOVING 312000-1 TO 312000-7 315000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000-1 TO 315000-X DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 329200 TURF AND GRASSES 329200-1 TO 329200-3 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-1 TO 330500-X APPENDIX I – GLOSSARY Pages 1-6 APPENDIX II – SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS Pages 1-2 APPENDIX III – SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Pages 1-3 APPENDIX IV –PROJECT SIGN Page 1 APPENDIX V – PREVAILING WAGE RATES Pages 1-31 DRAWINGS - BOUND SEPARATELY TITLE SHEET TS CIVIL SITE PLAN C1.1 ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A2.1 STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES S0.0 FOUNDATION PLAN AND DETAILS S2.0 MEZZANINE PLANS S3.0 SECTIONS AND DETAILS S4.0 MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES M0.0 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN – HVAC DEMOLITION M1.0 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN – HVAC REVISIONS M3.0 CONTROL DIAGRAMS M6.0 DETAILS M7.0 PLUMBING SANITARY SYSTEM REPAIR P3.1 FIRE PROTECTION PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN – FIRE PROTECTION FP3.0 ELECTRICAL PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN - DEMOLITION E1.0 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN - DEMOLITION E1.1 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E3.0 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN E4.0 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS E6.0


DIVISION 00

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS


00-1

SECTION 00010 PRE-BID INFORMATION 1. Invitation to Bid (ITB) − Your firm is invited to submit a Bid. The State of Michigan as the Owner will receive sealed Bids,

delivered to the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration (DTMB-FBSA), General Office Building, 3B, 7150 Harris Drive, Dimondale, Michigan 48821, for General Services Building – Restroom Renovation and ACU 9&10 Replacement until 2:00 P.M., local time, on October 29, 2014, when all Bids duly received will be opened publicly and read aloud. The State reserves the right to cancel this Invitation to Bid (ITB) or change the date and time for submitting Bids by announcing same at any time before the established date and time for Bid opening. Bids must remain open for acceptance by the Owner for no less than the Bid hold period. Contractor may agree to extend the Bid hold period. However, any such extension must be based upon no increase in the Bid Price and/or Contract Time.

2. Work Description − The Work, General Services Building – Restroom Renovation and ACU 9&10 Replacement, Index No. 44208, DTMB File No. 071/13011.SMD includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

The General Services building has a print room on the north side of the building which is currently conditioned via (2) grade mounted, air cooled, air handling units. The current system has zero redundancy and is at the end of its useful life. The grade mounted units will be replaced with (2) new units mounted indoors on a mezzanine in the north east corner of the print room. Each of the (2) new units are sized to accommodate 100% load during peak heating or cooling providing 100% redundancy. The print room currently has 2x4 suspended ceiling grid at 12’ above finished floor. The ceiling, lights, fire alarm, and fire suppression will need to be modified to accommodate the new mezzanine and equipment.

After the addition of the west restroom group in the 90’s the sanitary piping was broken due to settling which resulted in backups and blockages. A sanitary pump station was added specifically for this restroom group as a temporary fix in order to maintain usage of the facilities. A new sanitary system lateral will be installed on the north side of the building to convey waste from the west restroom group to the sanitary main on the east side of the building. The existing restroom sanitary will need to be exposed, repaired, and rerouted out the north end wall to tie in to the new sanitary lateral.

The site is located at 7461 Crowner Drive, Dimondale, MI, as shown on the Drawings.

3. Bidding Documents − Sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained at www.Buy4Michigan.com or from the Professional at

www.kibbe.com, William A. Kibbe & Associates, Inc., 1475 S. Washington Ave., Saginaw, MI 48601 (989-752-5000). 4. Bid Security − Each Bid must enclose Bid Security, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's Base Bid, paid to the

“State of Michigan” in the form of a certified or cashier’s check or money order drawn upon a bank insured by an agency of the Federal Government or a bid bond with an authorized surety company.

5. Pre-Bid Conference − A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the General Services Building, Dimondale, MI, on

October 20, 2014 at 10:00am Local Time. A tour of the General Services Building, Dimondale, MI will be held on the same day, starting at 11:30am local time. All prospective Bidders are required to attend the tour, if held. Other parties interested in the Work are encouraged to attend the tour. Addenda may be issued, in response to issues raised at the pre-bid conference and tour, or as the Owner and/or Professional may otherwise consider necessary.

The purpose of the pre-bid conference and inspection is to answer questions and provide an inspection tour of the Project site

at the scheduled time on the day of the meeting. A representative will be available to assist the Contractors. Other inspection visits may be allowed if needed. Individuals needing special services to fully participate in the meeting due to a disability may contact Scott Davis at 517-636-0520.

6. Equal Employment Opportunity − Covenants to not discriminate in employment by Contractors, Subcontractors and

Suppliers required by Law are contained in Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions and are applicable to the Work and any Sub-agreement under the Contract.

7. Contract Times − The Contract Times and the associated liquidated damages are specified in the Contract. 8. Contact Person − All requests or inquiries concerning the Bidding Documents or the Work must be addressed to: Christopher

Miller, P.E., C.E.M., William A. Kibbe & Associates, Inc., 1475 S. Washington Ave., Saginaw, MI 48601, email: [email protected] Questions will be accepted until October 22, 2014 at noon (12:00pm) Local Time.

9. Award − Subject to any agreed extension of the period for holding Bids, Bids must remain valid for acceptance by the Owner

for 60 Calendar Days after the date of Bid opening. In addition, the Owner expressly reserves the right, within the Owner's sole discretion, to reject any or all Bids, to waive any irregularities, to issue post-Bid Addenda and re-bid the Work without re-advertising, to re-advertise for Bids, to withhold the award for any reason the Owner determines and/or to take any other appropriate action.

http://www.buy4michigan.com/

http://www.kibbe.com/


00-2

10. Performance and Payment Bonds – A performance bond and a payment bond are required for all contracts over $50,000.00.

END OF SECTION 00010


00-3

SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. PREPARATION OF BID: Execute Bid fully and properly. Bid Summary Form (DTMB -0401D) and Bid Form Attachments

must be used and completely filled out for the Bid to be considered responsive and meeting the requirements of the contract solicitation. All Bid prices must be printed or typed in both words and figures.

2. BID CHECKLIST: Submit one Bid Summary Form with original signatures plus Bid Form Attachments in a sealed envelope.

On the outside of the envelope, identify: i) the Project by name, file number, index number and location; ii) Bidder’s name, complete address and phone number; and “Sealed Bid Enclosed” written on the envelope.

A complete Bid will consist of the following forms, which are included immediately following the Bid Summary Form: Bids SUBMIT THESE Bid Forms and Bid Form Attachments All Bids □ Signed and completed Bid Summary Form (DTMB-0401D);

□ Bid Schedule;

□ Qualified Disabled Veteran (QDV) Business Representation;

□ Bid Security in the amount of 5% of Base Bid Price;

□ Signature Authorization or copy of the partnership agreement if signed by all partners; Over $250K □ Forms listed under All Bids;

□ Certification of a Michigan Based Business;

□ Payment and Performance Bond (upon issuing the Notice of Award).

□ Copy of valid Certificate of Awardability (See Item 5. CERTIFICATE OF AWARDABILITY: below); Apparent Low Bidders ONLY (upon request from the Professional) □ Experience Modification Rating (EMR), or a letter stating why the Bidder does not have one.

□ Identification of the proposed project superintendent, with a resume or list of similar projects handled by that individual.

□ A list of at least three (3) projects completed by the Bidder, within the last three (3) years of similar size and complexity, with contact information for references for each.

3. BID SUBMISSION: Deliver Bid package to the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business

Services Administration, Design and Construction Division before the opening time when Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud.

Your proposal must be received on or before the Bid opening date and the time stated in the Bidding Documents. NOTE:

Some express mail services guarantee delivery by 3:00 p.m. However, your Bid WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED if not received at Facilities and Business Services Administration by the 2:00 p.m. time required.

4. BID GUARANTEE: Each proposal must be accompanied by either a bank certified or cashier's check on an open, solvent

bank or a bid bond with an authorized surety company (the surety must be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570) in the amount of five percent of the base bid payable to the State of Michigan, as a guarantee of good faith. If the successful Bidder fails to furnish satisfactory bonds and insurance within fifteen Calendar Days after Notice of Award, such guarantee must be forfeited to the State as liquidated damages. The bid security, exclusive of bid bonds, of all unsuccessful Bidders will be returned when an award is made or upon substitution of a bid bond. The bid security of the successful Bidder will be returned when the performance bond and labor and material bond are approved.

5. CERTIFICATE OF AWARDABILITY: The Contractor must not discriminate on the basis of religion, race, color, national origin,

age, sex, marital status, height, weight, arrest record or disability. Prior to the award of any Contract of $250,000.00 or more, the Michigan Department of Technology, Management and Budget (DTMB) Contract Compliance Representative will notify the Michigan Department of Civil Rights (DCR) Contract Compliance Representative, providing a bid tabulation and providing a description of the recommended awardee(s) including business(es)’ name, business(es)’ designated contact person, last four digits of company(ies)’ tax identification number, business(es)’ address, and business(es)’ contact person telephone number. In the event a contractor does not have a valid Certificate of Awardability and is the best value low bidder, the contractor must immediately submit, upon notification by DTMB, their application to DCR. DCR will process the requests as quickly as possible.


00-4

6. MICHIGAN BASED BUSINESS CERTIFICATION: All Bidders submitting Bids in excess of $100,000.00 must complete the Certification of Michigan Based Business. This information will determine if a Bidder qualifies as a "Michigan" business for purposes of application of reciprocity where applicable.

7. POST-BID SUBMITTAL: For projects over $250,000, the Professional will request a Post-Bid Submittal from the

Apparent Low Bidders. The Apparent Low Bidders must submit to the Professional, within two Business Days after receipt of the Professional’s request,

• Experience Modification Rating (EMR), or a letter stating why the Bidder does not have one. • Identification of the proposed project superintendent with a resume or list of similar projects managed by that

individual. • A list of at least three (3) projects completed by the Bidder, within the last three (3) years of similar size and

complexity, with contact information for references for each. Failure to provide the submittals may disqualify the Bid.

8. SIGNATURES: All Bids, notifications, claims, and statements must be signed as follows:

(a) Corporations: Signature of official must be accompanied by a certified copy of the Resolution of the Board of Directors authorizing the individual signing to bind the corporation.

(b) Partnerships: Signature of one partner must be accompanied by a signed copy of the legal document (e.g. Power of Attorney or partnering agreement) authorizing the individual signing to bind all partners. If Bid is signed by all partners, no authorization is required.

(c) Individual: No authorization is needed. Each signature must be witnessed. 9. BID PRICES: The Bidder’s Base Bid and Alternate Bid prices must include, and payment for completed Work will compensate

in full for: all services, obligations, responsibilities, management, supervision, labor, materials, devices, equipment, construction equipment, general conditions, permits, patent fees and royalties, testing, inspection and approval responsibilities, warranties, temporary facilities, small tools, supplies, Bonds, insurance, taxes, mobilization, close-out, overhead and profit and all connections, appurtenances and any other incidental items of any kind or nature, as are necessary to complete the Work, in a neat, first quality, workmanlike and satisfactory manner in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and as otherwise required to fulfill the requirements of the Bidding Documents. For each Cash Allowance item, the Bidder must include, within the Bid, all labor costs, construction equipment costs, insurance and Bond premiums and other general conditions costs and Fees (Bidder’s and Subcontractors’) to complete Work associated with the material, equipment or other designated item to be furnished under the Cash Allowance. For each Provisionary Allowance, the Bidder must include, within the Bid, insurance, premiums (not recoverable as labor burden) and Bond premiums required to complete Work that may be ordered under a Provisionary Allowance.

10. INSPECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SITE CONDITIONS: The Bidder must carefully review and inspect all

documents referenced and made part of this ITB, site conditions, all applicable statutes, regulations, ordinances and resolutions addressing or relating to the goods and services under this contract. Failure to do so or failure to acquire clarifications and answers to any discovered conflicts, ambiguities, errors or omissions in the Bidding Documents will be at the Bidder’s sole risk.

11. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND LAWS: The Bidder awarded the Contract must comply with all applicable federal, state and

local Laws including health and safety regulations, environmental protection, permits and licensing. 12. INTERPRETATIONS AND ALTERATIONS TO THE BID AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS: All requests for clarification or

interpretation of the Bidding Documents, all proposals for any modifications to the Bidding Documents, all requests for information and all other questions or inquiries about the Bidding Documents and/or the Work shall be submitted in writing to the Contact Person identified in the Bid Documents. Requests or inquiries received less than seven Calendar Days before the date of Bid opening will be answered only if (a) the response can be given through an Addendum made available at least seventy-two hours before Bid opening (counting Business Days only), (b) the Bid opening is postponed by Addendum, or (c) the Work is rebid without readvertising following the issuance of post-Bid Addenda. Bidders must not rely upon any oral statements or conversations regarding interpretations, clarifications, corrections, additions, deletions or other revisions or information to the Bidding Documents. Any addition, limitation or provision made with or attached to the Bid may render it non-responsive and/or irregular and be a cause for rejection. The Owner reserves the right to issue a post-Bid Addendum after opening the Bids and set a new date for the receipt and opening of sealed Bids. The Bidder acknowledges that any quantities of Unit Price Work given in this ITB are approximate only and payments will be made only for actual quantities of Unit Price Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

13. MODIFICATION OF RECEIVED BID: A modification of a Bid already received will be considered only if the modification shows

increase or decrease to the original bid and is submitted in writing in the Bid form(s) and received before the Bid opening time and date. Modifications may be submitted by a fax to (517) 284-7970.


00-5

14. BID WITHDRAWAL: Except for timely filed claims of mathematical or clerical errors granted by the State, no Bid may be withdrawn within sixty Calendar Days after the Bid Opening time and date or before the Bid expiration date without forfeiting Bid security. The request to withdraw a Bid due to error must be submitted in writing along with the supporting documents within two Business Days after the date of Bid Opening. The claim must describe in detail the error(s), include a signed affidavit stating the facts of the alleged error(s) and request that the Bidder be released from its Bid. The review of the claim and its supporting documents by the State is only for the purpose of evaluating the Bidder’s request and must not create duty or liability on the State to discover any other Bid error or mistake. The sole liability of any Bid error or mistake rests with Bidder.

15. BID OPENING; OBJECTION TO THE AWARD: Bids will be opened and publicly read at the opening time and date. A Bidder

may file a written protest with the Director-FBSA to object to the Apparent Low Bidder. This objection must be filed within seven Calendar Days after the date of Bid opening and must describe in detail the basis for the protest and request a determination. The Director-FBSA will either dismiss or uphold the protest and notify the protestor within ten Calendar Days after receipt of the written protest.

16. BID IRREGULARITIES: The following irregularities on any Bid Form or Bid Form Attachment must be resolved as follows:

(a) between words and figures, the words must be used; (b) between any sum, computed by the Bidder, and the correct sum, the sum computed by the Bidder must be used; (c) between the product, computed by the Bidder, of any quantity and Bid Unit Price and the correct product of the Unit Price

and the quantity of Unit Price Work, the product extended by the Bidder must be used; (d) between a stipulated Allowance and the amount entered, the Allowance must be used; (e) any mobilization pay item exceeding the maximum specified must be ignored and the Bid must remain unchanged; (f) if any Bidder fails or neglects to bid a Unit Price for an item of Unit Price Work but shows an "Bid Price" for that item, the

missing unit price must be computed from the respective quantity and the Item Bid Price shown; (g) if any Bidder fails or neglects to show a "Bid Price" for an item of Unit Price Work but bids a unit price, the missing Bid

Price must remain as “zero”; and (h) if any Bidder fails or neglects to enter a Bid Price in both words and figures, the Bid Price printed or typed, whether in

words or figures, must be used.

17. CERTIFICATION: The bidder certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that, within the past three (3) years, the bidder, an officer of the bidder, or an owner of a 25% or greater interest in the bidder: (a) Has not been convicted of a criminal offense incident to the application for or performance of a contract or subcontract

with the State of Michigan or any of its agencies, authorities, boards, commissions, or departments. (b) Has not had a felony conviction in any state (including the State of Michigan). (c) Has not been convicted of a criminal offense which negatively reflects on the bidder’s business integrity, including but not

limited to, embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, receiving stolen property, negligent misrepresentation, price-fixing, bid-rigging, or a violation of state or federal anti-trust statutes.

(d) Has not had a loss or suspension of a license or the right to do business or practice a profession, the loss or suspension of which indicates dishonesty, a lack of integrity, or a failure or refusal to perform in accordance with the ethical standards of the business or profession in question.

(e) Has not been terminated for cause by the Owner. (f) Has not failed to pay any federal, state, or local taxes. (g) Has not failed to comply with all requirements for foreign corporations. (h) Has not been debarred from participation in the bid process pursuant to Section 264 of 1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL

18.1264, or debarred or suspended from consideration for award of contracts by any other State or any federal Agency. (i) Has not been convicted of a criminal offense or other violation of other state or federal law, as determined by a court of

competent jurisdiction or an administrative proceeding, that in the opinion of DTMB indicates that the bidder is unable to perform responsibly or which reflects a lack of integrity that could negatively impact or reflect upon the State of Michigan, including but not limited to, any of the following offenses under or violations of: 1. The Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act, 1994 PA 451, MCL 324.101 to 324.90106. 2. A persistent and knowing violation of the Michigan Consumer Protection Act, 1976 PA 331, MCL 445.901 to

445.922. 3. 1965 PA 166, MCL 408.551 to 408.558 (law relating to prevailing wages on state projects) and a finding that the

bidder failed to pay the wages and/or fringe benefits due within the time period required. 4. Repeated or flagrant violations of 1978 PA 390 MCL 408.471 to 408.490 (law relating to payment of wages and

fringe benefits). 5. A willful or persistent violation of the Michigan Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1974, PA 154, MCL

408.10001 to 408.1094, including: a criminal conviction, repeated willful violations that are final orders, repeated violations that are final orders, and failure to abate notices that are final orders.

6. A violation of federal or state civil rights, equal rights, or non-discrimination laws, rules, or regulations. 7. Been found in contempt of court by a Federal Court of Appeals for failure to correct an unfair labor practice as

prohibited by Section 8 of Chapter 372 of the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U. s. C. 158 (1980 PA 278, as amended, MCL 423.321 et seq).

(j) Is not an Iran-Linked Business as defined in MCL 129.312.


00-6

A false statement, misrepresentation or concealment of material facts on this certification may be grounds for rejection of this proposal or termination of the award and may be grounds for debarment. 18. REJECTION OF BID: The Bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any Bids and to waive any informality, defects

or irregularity in any Bid received. In addition, the Bidder recognizes the right of the Owner to reject a Bid if: (a) the Bid is in any way incomplete or irregular; (b) the Bidder, Subcontractor or Supplier is not responsible as determined by the Owner; (c) the Bidder’s performance as a Contractor was unsatisfactory under a prior Contract with the Owner for the construction,

repair, modification or demolition of a facility with the Owner, or under any other Contract, which was funded, directly or indirectly, by the Owner;

(d) there are reasonable grounds for believing that collusion or unlawful agreements exists between any Bidders, that a Bidder is interested in more than one Bid, or that the Bid is not genuine;

(e) the Bid exceeds the funds available; or (f) the Bidder does not have a valid Certificate of Awardability or does not qualify for consideration given to bids received

while final certification is still pending. 19. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION: Any Bidder wishing to use manufacturers or materials other than those

specified must submit a written request to the Professional not later than seven days before due date for Bids. Request must be accompanied by product data to permit evaluation and comparison with specified products or materials. The Person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. The Professional and the Owner will examine and evaluate the product data and if found acceptable, an Addendum will be issued and mailed or delivered to each Person who has received a set of Drawings and Specifications. All Addenda issued must be made a part of the Contract requirements. Contractor will be responsible for any extra work and expense incurred to satisfactorily and completely incorporating each substitute product into the Project.

20. MICHIGAN PRODUCTS AND RECYCLED PRODUCTS: All Contractors and Suppliers are encouraged to provide

Michigan-made products and/or recycled products and/or green products and/or environmentally-friendly products whenever possible where price, quality, and performance are equal to, or superior to, non-Michigan products and the requirements of the Contract Documents. A list of Michigan-made products is available at: www.michigan.gov/dcd. The Contractor will be required to use alternatives to landfills for waste disposal such as reuse or recycle of asphalt, bricks, concrete, masonry, plastics, paint, glass, carpet, metals, wood, drywall, insulation and any other waste materials to the extent practical.

21. PRE-AWARD PRODUCT SUBMITTALS: If requested, the Apparent Low Bidders must submit a summary of preliminary

technical data on each product listed in the equipment schedule on sheet E-201 & E-202 of the drawings. The Apparent Low Bidders will furnish this summary data to the Professional within forty-eight hours of the Bid Opening. These submittals will be used to evaluate the Bid before the award. Failure to provide the submittals may disqualify the Bid.

22. CONTRACT AND CONTRACT AWARD: The Owner intends to award a Contract to the responsive and responsible best

value bidder, except as provided below relative to veteran’s preference. 22.1 Determination of the lowest three Bidders shall be on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and any additive and deductive

Alternates the Owner accepts, in the order in which they are listed only. The Owner will accept an Alternate only if all other previously listed Alternates are also accepted, unless acceptance by the Owner of Alternates in a different order does not affect determination of the lowest three bidders in any way.

22.2 The bids will be evaluated for best value based on price and qualitative components by comparing the qualitative

components of the three lowest responsive and responsible Bidders. The comparison may also include other Bidders whose bids are within 10% of the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder.

22.3 If a Qualified Disabled Veteran meets the requirements of the contract solicitation and with the veteran’s preference is the

lowest Bidder, the Owner will award the contract to the Qualified Disabled Veteran bidder. A determination as to whether the requirements of the bid solicitation have been met will be based solely on the Owner’s and Professional’s evaluation of the Bid Summary, Bid Attachments, Bidder-provided documents, and interview.

22.4 For the purpose of evaluating and determining the low responsive bid, 10% of the lowest responsive bid (the bid that would

otherwise receive the contract award if the preference were not being considered) will be deducted from all QDV bids. If the low responsive QDV bid, less the 10% preference, is less than the lowest responsive bid, then the QDV bid will be declared the official low responsive bid. The original QDV bid amount will be the basis of the contract award.

Example: Lowest Responsive Bid $100,000 Lowest Responsive QDV Bid $109,000 Preference (10% of the Lowest Responsive Bid) $ 10,000 Lowest Responsive QDV Bid Less Preference $ 99,000 ($109,000 - $10,000) Official Low Responsive Bid $109,000

http://www.michigan.gov/dcd


00-7

22.5 The Apparent Low Bidders will be evaluated for responsiveness and responsibility based on the following:

• Compliance with the bid specifications and requirements. • The Bidder’s financial resources. • The Bidder’s technical capabilities. • The Bidder’s technical experience. • The Bidder’s past performance. • The Bidder’s insurance and bonding capacity. • The Bidder’s business integrity.

Some qualitative components that may be evaluated are:

• Technical approach. • Quality of proposed personnel. • Management plans. • Scheduling of forces to complete project in the time period allotted.

22.6 For contracts under $250,000, best value will primarily be based on the lowest responsive and responsible bid. 23. CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Work of all trades as specified in the Contract Documents must be completed

in 180 days based on Notice-to-Proceed except for minor replacement, correction, or adjustment items which do not interfere with the complete operation and utilization of all parts of the Contract Work. This Contract Time is of the essence and liquidated damages for each Calendar Day that expires after this Substantial Completion of the entire Work must be in the amount of $500.00 per calendar day Liquidated damages are not a penalty, are cumulative and represent a reasonable estimate of the Owner’s extra costs and damages, which are difficult to estimate with accuracy in advance.

24. MOBILIZATION: If used in the Specifications/Bid schedule, all the up-front costs incurred by the Contractor must be covered

by the mobilization. The costs to establish temporary site offices, to obtain required permits for commencing the Work and for bonds and insurance premiums are examples of costs to the Contractor that are covered by mobilization pay item. This cost must not exceed four percent (4%) of the Base Bid, unless otherwise expressly provided in the Bidding Documents.

25. SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL: All Work under this Contract must meet the storm water management

requirements of the Project and comply with the applicable Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control (SESC) rules and regulations and specific provisions for same within the Contract Documents. SESC measures will be monitored and enforced by the Facilities and Business Services Administration, or another authorized enforcing agency if so delegated, through the review of the Contractor’s implementation plans and site inspections. Facilities and Business Services Administration or the Professional will notify the Contractor in writing of any violation(s) of the applicable SESC statutes and/or the corrective action(s) undertaken by the Owner and may issue stop work orders. Facilities and Business Services Administration has the right to assess a fine to the Contractor for noncompliance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and/or SESC regulations applicable to this Work and fines must be in addition to any other remediation costs or liquidated damages applicable to the Project and may exceed the value of the Contract.


SECTION 00120 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS The provisions of this Section amend or supplement Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and those other provisions of the Bidding Requirements that are indicated below. All other Bidding Requirements that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.



00-8

SECTION 00200 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS 1. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

Information or data about physical conditions of existing Underground Utilities, which have been used by the Professional in preparing the Bidding Documents, is shown or indicated in the Drawings and technical Specifications and those Underground Utility drawings itemized immediately below. All utility locations shall be verified before work to begin. The contractor is responsible to maintain current utilities which include but not limited to, gas, power, water, sewer and easements of such utilities.

2. PERMITS, APPROVALS, LICENSES AND FEES 2.1 If the Owner has secured or will secure any permits, approvals and licenses and has paid or will pay any associated charges

and fees, any such permits, approvals and licenses are itemized in this paragraph:

Except for any permits, approvals, licenses and fees identified above, the Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, approvals, licenses and fees applicable to Work.

3. SEQUENCING REQUIREMENTS

Refer to the technical Specifications, including, but not limited to the General Requirements, for information, data and criteria on sequences of Work restraints, construction and maintenance of service to existing facilities, which, if provided, must govern the selection of Work sequences. Each Bidder must be responsible for any conclusions or interpretations the Bidder makes related to the selection of sequences and Means and Methods, based on the technical data made available, and/or those additional investigations or studies made or obtained by that Bidder.

4. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

In preparing the bidding documents, the PSC was unable to verify all sub surfaces.

END OF SECTION 00200 SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. Interpretations: Any requests for clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents must be in writing to the

Professional, who will issue written clarifications or interpretations as appropriate. If the Contractor believes that such clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment to the Contract Price/Time, the Contractor must promptly notify the Professional in writing before proceeding with the Work Involved.

1.1 Standards: The Contract Documents describe the entire Work. The provisions of the Contract Documents must govern over

any standard specifications, manual or code of any technical society, organization or association but, if lower than the standards set by any Law applicable to the Work or the Project, the higher standards must govern. The Contractor’s responsibilities extend to cover Subcontractors and Suppliers if liable as a result of their actions or obligations.

1.2 Contract Time Computation: The time to complete the Work must be made in Calendar Days and must include both the first

and last day. The first day is established by the Notice-to-Proceed. 1.3 Technical Specifications and Priority: The following applies whenever priority is called for in Contract Documents:

specifications must govern Drawings; figured dimensions must govern scaled dimensions; detail drawings must govern general drawings; Drawings must govern Submittals.

1.4 Indemnification: The Contractor is required to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Professional, their

employees, agents, servants, and representatives from and against all claims, suits, demands, actions of whatever type and nature and all judgments, costs, losses and damages, whether direct, indirect or consequential including, but not limited to, charges of architects, engineers, attorneys and others and all court, hearing and any other dispute resolution costs arising from: (a) any patent or copyright infringement by the Contractor; (b) any damage to the premises or adjacent lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements, including loss of

use to the business and property of others as a result of Contractor’s operations; (c) any bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or injury to or destruction of property, including loss of use due to or related to

the Work and caused in whole or in part by the Contractor or Subcontractor or Supplier’s negligence, omissions or failure to maintain the required insurance and coverage and;


00-9

(d) a failure by the Contractor to appropriately handle Hazardous Materials for the Work or the Contractor’s operations in compliance with the Owner requirements and/or applicable Laws and regulations.

The indemnification obligations are not affected by the limitation on the amount and types of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor or Supplier under worker’s or workman’s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

1.5 Contract Documents Ownership: The State is the owner of the Contract Documents. The Contractor, Subcontractor or

Supplier must not reuse any of the documents on any other Project without prior consent of the State and Professional. The Professional will furnish on behalf of the Owner at no cost to the Contractor, up to ten copies of Drawings and Project Specifications.

2. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2.1 Owner: the Project Director and/or Owner Field Representative will represent the Owner. Neither the Project Director nor the

Owner Field Representative has the authority to interpret the requirements of the Contract Documents or to authorize any changes in the Work or any adjustment in Contract Price/Time. The State will provide the necessary easements for permanent structure and permanent changes in existing lands, areas, properties and facilities. However, the Contractor must obtain, at no increase in Contract Price/Time, permits for any other lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements required by the Contractor for temporary facilities, storage, disposal of soil or waste material or any other purpose. The Contractor must submit copies of the permits and written agreements to the Owner. The Contractor must engage a registered land surveyor to establish the necessary reference points and/or base lines for construction and must be responsible for protecting them including benchmarks and Project elevations.

2.2 Professional: Acting as the Owner’s representative during the Contract Time period, the Professional will endeavor to guard

the Owner from Defective work and to keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work. Unless delegated by specific written notice from the Owner, the Professional and the Professional’s representatives do not have the authority to authorize any changes in the Work or any adjustment in Contract Price/Time. The On-site Inspections by the Owner Field Representative and/or the Professional do not relieve the Contractor from its obligation to provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or represent acceptance of Defective Work.

2.3 Contractor: The Contractor must manage, supervise, and direct the Work competently, applying the management,

supervision, skills, expertise, scheduling, coordination and attention necessary to provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents with a minimum disturbance to or interference to the business operations on site or adjacent properties. The Contractor must assign and maintain a competent full-time superintendent on the Work, as its representative, at all times while Work is being done on site and must not be replaced without the Owner’s consent. The Contractor shall enforce good order among its employees and shall not employ on the work any disorderly, intemperate, or unfit persons, or not skilled in the work assigned to them. The Contractor is solely responsible for his Means and Methods, safety precautions and programs related to safety, the Contractor’s failure to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and any act of omissions by the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier. The Contractor must compare Contract Documents for conflicts, unworkable or unsafe specified Means and Methods and verify against manufacturer’s recommendations for installations and handling and must notify the Professional in writing of the discovery of any such conflicts or errors. The Contractor is required to furnish certifications that lines and grades for all concrete work were checked before and after placing concrete, and that final grades are as required by the Contractor Documents. Wherever required, the Contractor must be responsible for all cutting, fitting, drilling, fixing-up, and patching of concrete, masonry, gypsum board, piping and other materials that may be necessary to make in-place Work and dependent Work fit together properly. The Contractor must restore to pre-existing conditions all walks, roadways, paved or landscaped areas and other real and personal property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. The Contractor must maintain at the site one copy of material safety data sheets (MSDS) and one copy of all as-built/Record Documents in good order and annotated in a neat and legible manner to show: (a) all revisions made, (b) dimensions noted during the furnishing and performance of the Work, and (c) all deviations between the as-built installation and the Contract Documents, all approved Submittals and all clarifications

and interpretations. The Contractor must maintain and furnish promptly to the Owner and the Professional upon their request daily field reports recording the on-site labor force and equipment (Contractor and Subcontractors); materials/equipment received; visits by Suppliers; significant in-progress and completed trade Work within major areas; and other pertinent information. The Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, death, injury or loss without any special instruction in emergencies and must give the Owner prompt written notice of any changes in Work resulting from the action taken for review and approval.

2.4 Subcontractors and Suppliers: The Owner assumes no contractual obligations to anyone other than the Contractor. All

trade construction Drawings must be field coordinated before fabrication and/or installation. The Owner reserves the right to reject or revoke, for its convenience, any approved Subcontractor/Supplier. Work performed by any Subcontractor or Supplier must be through an appropriate written agreement that:


00-10

(a) expressly binds the Subcontractor/Supplier to the requirements of the Contract Documents, (b) requires such Subcontractor or Supplier to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations that the Contractor assumes

toward the Owner and the Professional, and (c) contains the waiver of rights and dispute resolution provisions.

2.5 Access to Payroll Records: The Contractor and its Subcontractors must comply with the Prevailing Wage Rates for the county where the Project is located, and must maintain and keep, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, records pertaining to the bidding, award and performance of the Work, including, but not limited to certified payroll, employment records and all data used in estimating the Contractor’s prices for the Bid, Change Order, proposal or claim. The Owner or its representative must have access to those records, must have the right to interview the Contractor’s employees and must be provided with appropriate facilities for the purpose of inspection, audit/review and copying for five years after final payment, termination or date of final resolution of any dispute, litigation, audit exception or appeal. The payroll and other employment records of workers assigned to the site must contain the name and address of each worker, correct wage classification, rate of pay, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deduction made and actual wages paid. The Contractor must maintain records that show: (a) the anticipated costs or actual costs incurred in providing such benefits, (b) that commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, and (c) that the plan or program is financially responsible and has been communicated in writing to the workers affected.

3. Bonds and Insurance: 3.1 Both the Performance Bond and Payment Bond must remain in effect from the date of Contract Award until final completion of

the Work or the end of Correction Period, whichever comes later. The surety bonds required for a Construction Contract will not be accepted by FBSA unless the surety bonding company is listed in the current United States Government, Department of Treasury’s, Listing of approved sureties (bonding/insurance companies), Department Circular 570. Copies of the current Circular listing may be obtained through the internet web site at http://www.fms.treas.gov/c570/c570.html.

Insurers must have an “A-“ A.M. Best Company Rating and a Class VII or better financial size category as shown in the most

current A.M. Best Company ratings. Insurance must be provided by insurers authorized by the Department of Insurance and Financial Services (DIFS) to do business as an insurer in Michigan. The insurance company and must attach evidence of the authorization. These certificates must specify the Project File No., Index No., Project Title, and a description of the Project. The Contractor agrees that insurance coverage afforded under the policies as such coverage relate to the State under this Contract as determined by the Contractor will not be modified or canceled without at least thirty calendar days prior written notice to the State. The latest A.M. Best’s Key Ratings Guide and the A.M. Best’s Company Reports (which include the A.M. Best’s Ratings) are found at: http://www.ambest.com. The Contractor must not perform any part of the Work unless the Contractor has all the required insurance in full force and effect.

3.2 The Contractor is required to provide proof of the minimum levels of insurance coverage as indicated below. The purpose of

this coverage must be to protect the State from claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s performance of services under the terms of this Contract, whether such services are performed by the Contractor, or by any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable.

The Contractor waives all rights against the State for recovery of damages to the extent these damages are covered by the insurance policies the Contractor is required to maintain pursuant to this Contract. The Contractor also agrees to provide evidence that all applicable insurance policies contain a waiver of subrogation by the insurance company.

All insurance coverages provided relative to this Contract/Purchase Order is PRIMARY and NON-CONTRIBUTING to any comparable liability insurance (including self-insurances) carried by the State. The Insurance must be written for not less than any minimum coverage herein specified or required by law, whichever is greater. All deductible amounts for any of the required policies are subject to approval by the State. The State reserves the right to reject insurance written by an insurer the State deems unacceptable. BEFORE THE CONTRACT IS SIGNED BY BOTH PARTIES OR BEFORE THE PURCHASE ORDER IS ISSUED BY THE STATE, THE CONTRACTOR MUST FURNISH TO THE DIRECTOR-FBSA CERTIFICATE(S) OF INSURANCE VERIFYING INSURANCE COVERAGE. THE CERTIFICATE MUST BE ON THE STANDARD “ACCORD” FORM. THE CONTRACT OR PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER MUST BE SHOWN ON THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO ASSURE CORRECT FILING. All such Certificate(s) are to be prepared by the Insurance Provider and not by the Contractor. All such Certificate(s) must contain a provision indicating that coverages afforded under the policies WILL NOT BE CANCELLED, MATERIALLY CHANGED, OR NOT RENEWED without THIRTY days prior written notice, except for 10 days for non-payment of premium, having been given to the Director-FBSA Such NOTICE must include the CONTRACT NUMBER affected and be mailed to the Project Director.

The Contractor is required to provide the type and amount of insurance below:

http://www.fms.treas.gov/c570/c570.html

http://www.ambest.com/


00-11

(a) Commercial General Liability Insurance with a limit of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence. If such CGL insurance contains a general aggregate limit, it must apply separately to this project.

The Contractor must list the State, its departments, divisions, agencies, offices, commissions, officers, employees and agents as ADDITIONAL INSUREDS on the Commercial General Liability policy.

(b) Vehicle Liability Insurance for bodily injury and property damage as required by law on any auto including owned, hired

and non-owed vehicles used in the Contractor’s business.

The Contractor must list the State, its departments, divisions, agencies, offices, commissions, officers, employers and agents as ADDITIONAL INSUREDS on the vehicle liability policy.

(c) Worker’s disability compensation, disability benefit or other similar employee benefit act with minimum statutory limits. NOTE: (i) If coverage is provided by a State fund or if Contractor has qualified as a self-insurer, separate certification must

be furnished that coverage is in the state fund or that Contractor has approval to be a self-insurer; (ii) Any citing of a policy of insurance must include a listing of the States where that policy’s coverage is applicable;

and (iii) This provision must not be applicable where prohibited or limited by Michigan law.

(d) Employer’s Liability Insurance with the following minimum limits:

$1,000,000 each accident $1,000,000 each employee by disease $1,000,000 aggregate disease

(e) Pollution Liability Insurance in the amounts of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence is required.

3.3 Liability Insurance: Liability insurance must be endorsed to list as additional insureds the Professional’s consultants and

agents. Worker’s Compensation, Employer’s Liability Insurance and all other liability insurance policies must be endorsed to include a waiver of rights to recover from the Owner, Professional and the other additional insureds. The Contractor’s liability insurance must remain in effect through the Correction Period and through any special correction periods. For any employee of the Contractor who is resident of and hired in Michigan, the Contractor must have insurance for benefits payable under Michigan’s Worker’s Compensation Law. For any other employee protected by Worker’s Compensation Laws of any other state, the Contractor must have insurance or participate in a mandatory state fund, where applicable, to cover the benefits payable to any such employee. These requirements must not be construed to limit the liability of the Contractor or its insurers. The Owner does not represent that the specified coverage or limits of insurance are sufficient to protect the Contractor’s interests or liabilities.

3.4 Builder’s Risk Insurance: Unless indicated otherwise on the Bid Summary, the Owner will purchase and maintain property

insurance for 100% of actual cash replacement value of the insurable Work while in the course of construction, including foundations, additions, attachments, and all fixtures, machinery and equipment belonging to and constituting a permanent part of the building structures. The property insurance also will cover temporary structures, materials and supplies to be used in completing the Work, only while on the building site premises or within five hundred feet of the site. The property insurance insures the interests of the Owner, Contractor and all Subcontractors and Suppliers at any tier as their interest may appear. The property insurance insures against “all risk” of physical loss or damage to the extent usually provided in policy forms of insurers authorized to transact this insurance in Michigan, but will be subject to a deductible of $10,000 for each loss occurrence. A copy of the master insurance policy will be kept at FBSA, for review by the Contractor and Subcontractors. The Contractor must cooperate with the Owner in determining the actual cash replacement value of any insured loss. Any deductible amount must be paid by the Contractor. The Owner may purchase and maintain for its benefit boiler and machinery insurance.

3.5 The Owner and Contractor intend that the required policies of property insurance must protect all the parties insured and

provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered. Accordingly, to the extent that the insurance company pays claims, the Owner and the Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers waive all rights against each other for any such losses and damages and also waive all such rights against the Professional and all other persons named as insureds or additional insureds.

4. Prosecutions; Substantial Completion: 4.1 The Contractor must not start the Work at the site before the first day established by the Notice to Proceed and/or before all

insurance is in effect. A pre-construction conference will be held with the Contractor to review its Progress Schedule, qualifications of its key personnel, its proposed access to the site, traffic and parking, procedures for submittal, change orders, etc., and to exchange emergency contact information. The Contractor must use its accepted Progress Schedule when making proposals or claims for adjustment in Contract Time/Price.


00-12

4.2 Except in an Emergency, all Work at the site must take place during normal working hours; 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM, during

Business Days and in accordance with the special working conditions for the Agency. If the Contract Documents allow work outside the normal hours, the Contractor must provide a written notice to the Owner twenty-four hours before performing such Work and must reimburse the Owner any related increase in the costs incurred by the Owner such as overtime charges of the Professional and payments for custodial and security personnel.

4.3 If, upon inspection and completing all pre-requisite testing of the Work, the Contractor considers that a portion of the work or all

of the Work is substantially completed, it must provide a list of items to be corrected or completed to the Owner and the Professional for joint inspection. Within ten Calendar Days of this joint inspection, the Professional will deliver to the Owner and Contractor a list of incomplete/Defective work or a Certificate of Substantial Completion with a Punch List. The certificate must: (a) fix a reasonable date of Substantial Completion, (b) fix a date for completion of the Punch List, and (c) recommend the division of responsibilities between the Owner and Contractor for utilities, security, safety, insurance,

maintenance, etc.

Upon issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay for the completed Work subject to (a) withholding of two hundred percent of the value of any uncompleted Work, as determined by the Professional, and (b) any other deductions as the Professional may recommend or may withhold to cover Defective work, liquidated damages and the fair value of any other items entitling the Owner to a withholding. Prerequisites for Substantial Completion, over and above the extent of Work completion required, include (a) receipt by the Owner of operating and maintenance documentation, (b) all systems have been successfully tested and demonstrated by the Contractor for their intended use, and (c) the Owner having received all required certifications and/or occupancy approvals from the State and those Political Subdivisions having jurisdiction over the Work. Receipt of all certifications and/or occupancy approvals from those Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction in and of itself does not necessarily connote Substantial Completion. The Contractor must provide all related operating and maintenance (O&M) documentation to the Owner before training if training is required and not later than Substantial Completion otherwise. The Contractor must give the Owner the final O&M documentation (with revisions made after Substantial Completion) before the request for final payment.

4.4 The Owner may decide to use, at its sole option, any functioning portion of the Work and will inform the Contractor in writing of

the decision. The portion of Work to be used must be jointly inspected to determine the extent of completion if it has not undergone the inspection for Substantial Completion. The Professional must prepare a list of items to be corrected/completed and the Owner will allow the Contractor reasonable access to correct/complete the listed items and finish other work.

5. Warranty; Tests, Inspections and Approvals; Corrections of Work: 5.1 Warranty: The Contractor must furnish the State with a written guarantee to remedy any defects due to faulty materials or

labor which appear in the Work within one year from the date of final acceptance by the State. This warranty excludes defect or damage caused by (a) abuse, modification by others, insufficient or improper operation or maintenance, or (b) normal wear and tear under normal usage. Manufacturer warranties for materials and equipment received by the Contractor must be assigned and promptly delivered to the Owner at Substantial Completion. The warranties period starts from the date of the substantial completion and must be in full force and effect for the entire duration of the Correction Period.

5.2 Tests, Inspections and Approvals: The Contractor will perform or retain a professional/agency to perform inspections, tests

or approvals for those materials required to meet quality control standards specified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor must assume full responsibility for any testing, inspection or approval (a) required to meet code requirements, as promulgated by code inspecting authorities; (b) required by Law; (c) indicated or required by the Contract Documents; (d) required for the Professional’s acceptance of a Supplier, materials or equipment or mix designs submitted for prior

approval by the Contractor; or (e) Defective work, including an appropriate portion of the Delay and costs occasioned by discovery of Defective work. The

Contractor must (a) pay all related costs; (b) schedule related activities; and (c) secure and furnish to the Professional the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor must provide proper and safe access to the site for inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor must provide the Professional a timely notice whenever any Work is ready for inspection, testing or approval. If the Contractor covers any Work without proper approval by the Professional as required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor must, at its own expense, uncover, expose or otherwise make available, when requested by the Professional or Owner, for testing, inspection or approval of the covered Work.

5.3 Correction of Work: If any testing, inspection or approval reveals Defective Work and the Work is rejected by the

Professional, the Contractor, at its sole expense, must promptly, as directed, correct or remove the Defective Work from the site and replace it with non-Defective Work within the Correction Period. The Contractor must bear responsibility for its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from the correction and/or removal and replacement of Defective Work. If the Contractor, within reasonable and agreed upon time after receipt of written notice, (a) fails to correct Defective Work or remove and replace rejected Work, or (b) fails to correct or complete items on any Punch List, or (c) fails to perform Work in


00-13

accordance with the Contract Documents, or (d) fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner, directly or through others, after seven Calendar Days from the date of the written notice to the Contractor, may correct and remedy the Defective Work. To the extent necessary to correct and remedy such Defective Work, the Owner must be allowed to exclude the Contractor from all or part of the site; take possession of all or part of the Work and stop related operations of the Contractor; take possession of the Contractor’s tools, plant and office and construction equipment at the site; and incorporate into the Work materials and equipment for which the Owner has paid the Contractor. The Contractor must allow the Owner and the Professional easy access to the site to correct such Defective Work. The Owner must be entitled to an appropriate decrease in Contract Price for all claims, costs, losses, damages and Delay incurred or sustained by the Owner which are attributable to the Contractor. Such costs may include, but not limited to, costs of correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work, costs of repair and replacement of other work destroyed or damaged by the action and related charges of the Professional. If the discovery of the Defective Work takes place after final payment and the Contractor fails to correct and pay the Owner any of these costs, the Owner must demand due performance under the Performance Bond. Until the period of limitation provided by Michigan Law, the Contractor must promptly, and upon receipt of written notice from the Owner, correct Defective Work. In the event of an Emergency or unacceptable risk of loss or damage or if appropriate under the circumstances, the Owner, directly or through others under contract with the Owner, may correct or remove and replace the Defective Work. The specified correction of Work requirements have no limitation on the rights of the Owner to have Defective Work corrected or removed and replaced, if rejected, except as otherwise provided by the Michigan Law.

5.4 Special Correction Period Requirements: Whenever the Owner undertakes any portion of the Work because the

Contractor’s act or omission Delays completion of the Work or it is eligible for Partial Use, the warranties for all materials and equipment incorporated into that portion of the Work must remain in full force and effect between the start of such Partial Use and the date when the Correction Period starts. The Correction Period for any Defective Work that is corrected or rejected and replaced within the last three months of the Correction Period must be extended by an additional six months, starting on the date such Work was made non-Defective.

5.5 Special Maintenance Requirements: If the Contract Documents specify that the entire Work, or a portion of the Work, upon

reaching Substantial Completion, must not be placed in use by the Owner, the Contractor must maintain the Work, or specified part of the Work, in good order and proper working condition and must take all other actions necessary for its protection between the certified date of Substantial Completion and the date when the Work, or designated part of the Work, is placed in use. If no separate price for such special maintenance period was requested and made part of the Contract Documents, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to appropriately increase the Contract Price.

6. Changes: 6.1 Changes in the Work: The Owner may, at any time, without notice to sureties, make any changes bilaterally or unilaterally, by

a written Change Order, in the Work within the general scope of the Contract, including but not limited to changes in the Specifications, materials, or Contract Time. In a bilateral change order, the Owner may direct the Professional to prepare a Bulletin describing the change being considered. Upon receiving the Bulletin, the Contractor establishes the cost and returns it to the Professional for review within 15 calendar days. The Contractor’s proposal must be irrevocable for 60 Calendar Days after it is submitted to the Professional. If the Professional recommends acceptance of the Bulletin and the Owner agrees with the changes, the Owner issues a written bilateral Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Documents. However, the Owner may issue a unilateral Change Order if the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on the adjustment in Contract Price or Time. If the Contractor disagrees with such unilateral Contract Change Order, the Contractor must complete the Work and may deliver notice of a claim in accordance with the claim submittal process.

6.2 Differing Site Condition: The Owner does not warrant that any technical data, including the Project reference points,

provided by the Owner is necessarily sufficient and complete for the purpose of selecting Means and Methods, initiating, maintaining and supervising safety precautions and programs or discharging any other obligation assumed by the Contractor under the Contract Documents. If different or unknown site conditions are discovered, the Contractor must notify the Owner in writing before the conditions are disturbed or before proceeding with the affected Work. Upon review, if the Owner decides to agree with the differing site conditions, with the Professional’s advice, the Owner may issue a written Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Price or Time through the Bulletin authorization process. If the Owner decides to disagree with the Contractor and the Contractor disagrees with the Owner’s decision, the Contractor must complete the Work and may deliver notice of a claim in accordance with the claim submittal process. No proposal or claim by the Contractor due to differing site conditions will be allowed (a) if the Contractor knew of their existence before submitting its Bid or if those conditions could have been discovered by any reasonable examinations for which the Contractor, as Bidder, was made responsible under the Bidding Requirements and/or (b) unless the Contractor’s notice is provided on a timely basis and gives the Owner adequate opportunity to investigate the asserted differing site conditions.

6.3 Responsibilities for Underground Utilities: The Contractor must comply with the 1974 PA 53, as amended, MCL 460.701

et seg., and all other Laws concerning Underground Utilities. Before performing site Work, all Underground Utilities, lines and cables (public and private) must be located and marked. The Contractor must notify MISS DIG to locate and mark utilities on properties that are not State properties. In addition, the Contractor must be responsible for immediately notifying the Owner of any contact with or damage to Underground Utilities, and for the safety, protection of and repairing any damage done to any Work, surface and subsurface facilities. If the Contractor encounters Underground Utilities that inaccurately located by the Contract Documents or not previously located/marked, which could not be reasonably have been seen, the


00-14

Owner may issue a written Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Price or Time through the Bulletin authorization process.

6.4 Hazardous Material Conditions: If the Contractor encounters material reasonably believed to be Hazardous Material,

which was not described in the Drawings and/or Specifications and was not generated or brought to the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall immediately stop all affected work, give written notice to the Owner of the conditions encountered, and take appropriate health and safety precautions in accordance with all federal, State and local laws. Upon receipt of the notice, the Owner will investigate the conditions and (a) may stop the Work and terminate the affected Work or the Contract for convenience; (b) may contract others to have the Hazardous Material removed or rendered harmless or; (c) issue a written Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Price/Time through the Bulletin authorization process. If the Hazardous Material is brought to site by the Contractor or as a result in whole or in part from any of its violation of any Law covering the use, handling, storage, disposal of, processing, transport and transfer or from any other act or omission within its control, the Contractor is responsible for the Delay and costs to clean up the site, remove and render harmless the Hazardous Material to the satisfaction of the Owner, State and all Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction.

6.5 Incidents with Archaeological Features: The Contractor must immediately notify the Owner in writing of any Archeological

Feature deposits encountered at the site and must protect the deposits in a satisfactory manner. If the Contractor encounters such features, which result in an anticipated change to the Contract Price/Time, the Owner may issue a written Contract Change Order through the Bulletin authorization process.

6.6 Cash Allowances; Provisionary Allowances: The Contractor must obtain the Professional’s and Project Director’s written

acceptance before providing materials, equipment, or other items covered by Cash Allowance. Work authorized under any Provisionary Allowance may consist of (a) changes required by actual conditions, as determined by the Professional, and (b) any other Work authorized and completed under the pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents.

6.7 Changes in Contract Price:

6.7.1 The Contractor’s proposals or claims for Work Involved must detail all affected items of Work, whether increased, revised,

added or deleted, and must be fully documented and itemized as to (a) individual adds and deducts in Work quantities and labor man-hours; (b) corresponding itemized cost of Work Involved; (c) materials and equipment cost including transportation, storage and suppliers’ field services; and (d) Fee.

6.7.2 For Contractor’s proposals or claims for adjustments in Contract Price arising from Delays, the Contractor’s estimates must

be as comprehensive and detailed as may be appropriate to support the proposal or claim. Examples of related information include labor manpower levels, production data and Progress Schedule revision.

6.7.3 If the Contract Documents use lump sum or Unit Prices for the Work Involved, those prices must be used in estimating the

price change. Otherwise, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed (a) on a negotiated lump sum; or (b) on an actual cost basis with or without a guaranteed maximum; or (c) through a unilateral Change Order on a lump sum basis or a not-to-exceed basis, based on the Professional’s estimate of the anticipated Cost of the Work Involved and a fee. Items making-up the Cost of the Work Involved must be allowable to the extent (a) consistent with those prevailing in the Project locality, (b) necessary, reasonable and clearly allocable to the Work Involved, and (c) limited to labor costs, subcontract costs, material and equipment costs, construction equipment costs and general conditions costs.

6.7.4 In estimating any additional cost by the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the rates for the craft labor man-hour used in

estimating changes in Contract Price must not exceed the rates in Means Cost Data (Means) or other cost guide acceptable to the Owner. If the rates exceed the acceptable cost guides, the Contractor must provide proper justifications acceptable to the Professional and the Owner. The payroll costs may be used to quote a Bulletin. However, the payroll costs must include wages, labor burdens and a factor for field supplies and purchase costs (less market values if not consumed) of tools not owned by the workers. Labor burdens must be certified by an authorized financial representative of the Contractor and may include social security, unemployment, taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, vacation and holiday pay. The factor for field supplies and tools (individually valued at less than $1,000.00) must not exceed 4% of the wages without burdens, unless detailed data, which supports higher costs, is provided. Rates for owned, rented or leased construction equipment must be in accordance with the contract price rates. Otherwise, the appropriate hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates listed in Means must be used. However, if the total rental or lease cost of an item to the Project exceeds the reasonable purchase price of the rented or leased item, the Owner reserves the right to pay only the purchase price of the item and take title to the item. Operating cost must not exceed the hourly operating rate in Means and for multiple shifts, rates must not exceed the shift work adjustments recommended in the cost guide.

6.7.5 The cost of any Work Involved may include necessary general conditions costs to the extent those costs increase or

decrease on account of, or are directly attributable to, the performance of the furnishing and/or performance of the additional Work Involved, or are required due to an extension in Contract Times or Delays. Such costs may include payroll costs of personnel, temporary facilities at the site, liability insurance and bond premiums, Subcontractors, royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses and taxes on the Work Involved.


00-15

6.7.6 A contractor or subcontractor who performs the Work may charge a fee of up to 15% of the cost of Work involved for overhead and profit. Contractor may charge a mark-up fee of up to 5% of its Subcontractor’s cost excluding fees if the Work is performed by the Subcontractor. If Work is to be performed by lower tier subcontractor(s), intermediate subcontractors must share a fee of up to 5% of the lowest tier subcontractor’s cost excluding fees. The total mark-up fees for the Work must not exceed 25% of the lowest tier subcontractor’s cost excluding fees. If the adjustment to the Contract Price incorporates a contractor reservation of rights to claim additional adjustments, the fees must be reduced by one-third. Contractor’s administrative costs and home office overhead must be non-reimbursable expenses covered by the Fee for the Work.

6.8 Changes in Contract Time: 6.8.1 If a justified extension beyond the Contract Time is not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances, the Owner may

approve an extension to the Contract Time through the Bulletin authorization process at no additional cost to the Owner. Examples of events that may justify an extension in the Contract Time include acts of God; acts of the public enemy; fires; floods; and strikes.

6.8.2 If, at any time during the life of this Contract, the Contractor finds that for reasons beyond its control, it will be impossible to

complete the Work on or before the Contract completion date, a written request for a change to the Contract extending the time of completion must be submitted. Such a request must set forth in precise detail the reasons believed to justify an extension and must be in such format as the State may require.

6.8.3 When submitting a quotation for a Contract change authorization for extra work or change in plans, the Contractor must

include as part of the quotation, a statement requesting any extra time necessary to complete the related Work. Lack of such a statement will serve as notification that the extra time will not be required to complete the Contract work and will waive the right to a later claim. The Owner will not pay additional compensation to the Contractor for performing Contract Work during any extension period granted.

6.8.4 If the Progress Schedule and the funding allow for an early completion date, the Contractor may submit to the Owner for

approval, a request to shorten the Contract Time. If approved by the Owner, the new Contract Time applies to the Project and liquidated damages, if any, will be assessed for any delays after the new completion date.

6.9 Price Reduction for Defective Cost or Pricing Data: Whenever the Contractor signs a proposal for a change in the

Contract or claim settlement, the Contractor will be deemed to have certified on behalf of itself, Subcontractors and Suppliers, to its best knowledge and belief that the proposal and its contents (a) were made in good faith and are consistent with the facts and the provisions of the Contract; and (b) are current, complete and accurate. If the Contract Price/Time is increased by any Change Order, claim or dispute settlement because the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier, at any tier, represented or furnished cost or pricing data of any kind that were false, contained math errors or were incomplete, the Contract Price must be correspondingly reduced by Change Order. If there is a good cause to doubt the Contractor’s compliance with the Defective cost and pricing data requirements, the Owner must be entitled to make an appropriate withholding from any payment otherwise owed to the Contractor.

7. Payments 7.1 Schedule of Values: The Schedule of Values must be approved by the Professional and accepted by the Owner and must

divide the Work into pay items for significant Sections and areas, facilities or structures, with subtotals for first tier Subcontractors. If required in Division 1, the accepted Schedule of Values must be supported by a more detailed breakdown allocating the pay items to the Progress Schedule Activities. It must tabulate labor costs, Subcontract costs and material and equipment costs. Labor costs must include appropriate sums for construction equipment costs, general conditions costs, administrative costs and profit, unless separate pay items are itemized for those costs. The Schedule of Values must include two percent of the Contract Price for each of the following close-out pay items: (a) fire safety inspection, certificate of occupancy and other code approvals, as specified in the Contract Documents, (b) manufacturer warranties, finalized operating and maintenance documentation, Owner training documentation, and test and balance reports, and (c) finalized as-built/Record Documents.

7.2 Requests for Payment: Not more than once every thirty Calendar Days, the Contractor may submit to the Professional a

Request for Payment on the Owner’s form signed by the Contractor certifying Work completed and enclosing all supporting documentation. A draft copy of the payment request may be submitted to the Owner Field Representative for review and comments. For projects under $50,000, the Contractor may not submit more than two requests in addition to the final payment request. Each Request for Payment must certify that all monies owed by the Contractor to Subcontractors and Suppliers for which payment previously has been sought has been paid from payments received. No Request for Payment must include amounts for a Subcontractor or Supplier if the Contractor does not intend to use the payments requested, when received, to reduce the Contractor’s outstanding obligations on the Work. The Owner will pay the Contractor within thirty Calendar Days after the Owner receives and approves a certified Request for Payment from the Professional. The Contractor will provide a certification in writing that the payment request submittal is true and accurate. If payment is requested based on materials and equipment stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Request for Payment also must be accompanied by (a) consent of surety, (b) a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that the Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect them and the Owner's interests. The


00-16

Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Request for Payment, whether incorporated in the Work or not, will pass to the Owner free and clear of all liens no later than at the time of payment by the Owner to the Contractor.

7.3 Review of Request for Payment; Intent of Review: Within ten Calendar Days after receipt of a Request for Payment, the

Professional must certify to the Owner the amount the Professional determines to be due, or must return the Request for Payment to the Contractor indicating the reasons for withholding certification. The Professional's certification of any Request for Payment constitutes a representation to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that to the best of the Professional's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents; and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. In the case of final payment, the Professional's certification of final payment and recommendation that the Work is acceptable must be a further representation that conditions governing final payment to the Contractor have been met.

7.4 Refusal to Make or to Recommend Payment: The Owner may withhold from any payment an amount based on the (a)

Professional's refusal to recommend payment or (b) Owner's estimate of the fair value of items included in the payment request. The Owner will give the Contractor reasonably prompt written notice supporting such action. The Professional may refuse to recommend any part of any payment, or because of subsequently discovered evidence, inspections or tests or the value of the Punch List, nullify all or any portion of any payment previously recommended, as the Professional may consider necessary to protect the Owner from loss because: (a) the Work is Defective or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (b) the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Order, (c) it has been necessary that the Owner correct Defective Work or complete Work, (d) reasonable evidence exists that all or a part of the Work will not be completed within the corresponding Contract Time, (e) the Contractor failed to comply with any material requirements of the Contract, including, but not limited to the failure to

submit Progress Schedule Submittals or as-built/Record Documents when due, (f) stored materials for which payment has been made or is sought has been determined by the Professional or the Owner

Field Representative to be damaged or missing, or (g) the Professional reasonably believes or knows of the occurrence of an event justifying termination for cause.

7.5 Request for Final Inspection: The Contractor must complete the Substantial Completion Punch List within the Contract

Time and date. The Contractor must assemble all required documentation before requesting final inspection in writing. The Contractor may request final inspection of the entire Work, or the part of the Work for which final payment is specified in the Contract Documents. Upon this written notice, and if deemed appropriate by the professional, the Professional will make a final completion inspection with the Owner and Contractor and notify the Contractor of all incomplete or Defective Work revealed by the Final Inspection. The Contractor must immediately correct and complete the Work.

7.6 Close-out Documents: The Contractor must prepare and submit the following documentation before requesting final

inspection or final payment: final operating and maintenance documentation (with revisions made after Substantial Completion), warranties, inspection certificates, as-built/Record Documents, release of payment claim forms, and all other required documents.

7.7 Request for Final Payment: The Contractor may request final payment after correcting or completing the Work to the

satisfaction of the Professional and delivering close-out documentation (7.6). The Contractor’s request for final payment must also enclose:

(a) evidence of completed operations insurance and an affidavit certifying that the insurance coverage will not be canceled,

materially changed, or renewal refused, (b) an affidavit certifying that the surety agrees that final payment does not relieve the surety of any of its obligations under

the Performance Bond and Payment Bond, (c) a completed DTMB-0460 Form close out checklist, (d) a list of all pending insurance claims rising out of or resulting from the Work being handled by the Contractor and/or its

insurer (e) Contractor’s ‘Guarantee and Statement’ (DTMB-0437) containing a statement of guaranteed indebtedness acceptable to

the Owner in the full amount of the Contract Price, or a release of payment claims in the form of a release of liens, or a Bond or other security acceptable to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any payment claim.

7.8 Final Payment and Acceptance: If the Professional is satisfied that the entire Work, or the part of the Work for which final

payment is specified in the Contract Documents, is complete and the Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents has been fulfilled, the Professional will furnish to the Owner and Contractor the Professional’s certification of final payment and acceptance within thirty Calendar Days after receipt of the final payment request. If the Professional is not satisfied, the Professional will return the request to the Contractor indicating in writing the reasons for not certifying final payment. If the final payment request is returned, the Contractor must correct the deficiencies and re-request final payment. If the Owner concurs with the Professional’s certification of final payment the Owner will, within thirty Calendar Days after receipt of the Professional’s certification of final payment, pay the balance of the Contract Price subject to those provisions governing final payment specified in the Contract Documents. If the Owner does not concur with the Professional’s


00-17

determination, the Owner will return the request for final payment to the Contractor with written reasons for refusing final payment and acceptance.

7.9 Contractor's Continuing Obligation: The following does not constitute acceptance of the Work in the event the Work or any

Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, and therefore does not release the Contractor from its obligation to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

(a) a certification by the Professional of any Request for Payment or final payment; (b) the issuance of a Substantial Completion certificate; (c) any payment by the Owner to the Contractor; (d) any Partial Use; (e) any act of acceptance by the Owner or any failure to do so; (f) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing, sample, test procedure or other Submittal; (g) any review of a Progress Schedule; (h) any On-Site Inspection; (i) any inspection, test or approval; (j) any issuance of a notice of acceptability by the Professional; or (k) any correction of Defective Work or any completion of Work by the Owner.

7.10 Waiver of Claims: The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any rights as to the

Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents, nor will it constitute a waiver of any claims by the Owner against the Contractor still unsettled, or arising from unsettled payment claims, Defective Work appearing after final inspection or failure by the Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special warranties provided by the Contract Documents or by Law. The acceptance of final payment will constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor against the Owner, other than those claims previously made in writing, on a timely basis.

8. Other Work: During the Contract Time, the Owner may self perform or Contract for other work at the site. By doing so, the

Owner or its representative will coordinate the operations of the Contractor and the other work. Whenever the other work interfaces with the Contractor’s Work on site, the Contractor must coordinate its activities with the interfacing work, inspect the other work and promptly report to the Professional in writing if the other work is unavailable or unsuitable. The Contractor’s failure to do so will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with the Work except for latent or non-apparent defects and deficiencies in the other work. The Contractor must provide proper and safe access to the site for handling, unloading and storage of their materials and equipment and for the execution of the other work. The Contractor must do all cutting, fitting, patching and interfacing of the Work that may be required to make any part of the Work come together properly and integrate with other work. If the Contractor becomes party to a dispute or claim due to damages caused to its Work/property or other work/their property, the Contractor must promptly attempt, without involving the Owner or the Professional or their agents, to settle with the other party by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim. If the Owner determines that the other work resulted in a delay to the Work to be performed by the Contractor and such delay justifies a Change Order, the Owner will authorize the necessary adjustment in Contract Price and/or Time.

9. Stop Work Orders and Suspension of Work: The Owner may order the Contractor in writing to defer, stop, suspend or

interrupt all or part of the Work, in the event any of the following situations: (a) any Work is Defective, (b) any Work, when completed, will not conform to the Contract Documents, (c) any materials or equipment are unsuitable, (d) any workers are insufficiently skilled, (e) failure of the Contractor to implement appropriate measures for the SESC, or (f) as the Owner may determine appropriate for its convenience. The Contractor is responsible for the Delays and any additional

costs if at fault. Any justified increase in Contract Price/Time due to suspension of Work must be submitted within thirty Calendar Days of knowing the extent of Delays and before submitting the final payment.

10. Termination: 10.1 Termination for Breach: The Owner may elect to terminate all or any part of the Work if:

(a) the Contractor fails to complete the Work, or a specified part of the Work, within the corresponding Contract Time; fails

or refuses to supply sufficient management, supervision, workers, materials or equipment; or otherwise fails to prosecute the Work, or any specified part of the Work, with the diligence required to comply with the Contract Time(s);

(b) the Contractor persistently disregards the authority of the Professional or violates or disregards a provision of the Contract Documents or the Laws of any Political Subdivision with jurisdiction;

(c) the Contractor admits in writing, or the Owner otherwise establishes, the Contractor's inability or refusal to pay the Contractor's debts generally as they become due;

(d) in response to the Owner's demand, the Contractor fails to provide adequate, written assurance that the Contractor has the financial resources necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Time;


00-18

(e) the Contractor fails to comply with the Michigan Residency requirements (1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL 18.1241a); or is found to be in violation of Section 4 of 1980 PA 278 concerning unfair labor practices, or any nondiscrimination requirements imposed by Law;

(f) at any time, the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier is in violation of unfair labor practices prohibited by Section 8 of Chapter 327 of the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. 158; or

(g) the Contractor violates or breaches any material provision of the Contract Documents, which provides contractually for cause termination or rescission of the Contract or of the Contractor’s right to complete the Work.

Within seven Calendar Days after the Contractor receives a notice requiring assurance of due performance for any of the above occurring non-conformances, the Contractor must meet with the Owner and present the Contractor’s plan to correct the problems. If the Owner determines that the Contractor’s plan provides adequate assurance of correction, that determination does not waive the Owner's right to subsequently default the Contractor or affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor and/or surety then existing or that may accrue in the future. The Owner, after giving the Contractor and surety seven Calendar Days’ written notice of intent to default, may declare the Contractor in default and terminate the services of the Contractor for cause. Unless otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor, at the expiration of the Seven-Calendar Day (intent to default) period, the Contractor must immediately stop all Work and proceed in accordance with the Owner’s instructions. Following the expiration of the Seven-Calendar Day (intent to default) notice, the Contractor will be sent a default letter – notice of termination for cause. The Owner will issue a Contract Change Order to revise the name of the contract party to the name of the surety company. The surety company must undertake to perform and complete the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents, in place of the Contractor, either through the surety's agents or by executing agreements with qualified contractors (excluding the Contractor and any of the Contractor's affiliates), or both.

The Owner may issue a fifteen-Calendar Day notice of intent to default the surety company if they fail to execute in a timely manner the completion of the Contract Work. Without an adequate plan of correction, the Owner may issue a notice of termination for cause letter to the surety. If a termination of the contract with the surety occurs, the Owner reserves the right to complete the Work.

If the Owner has terminated the Contractor, any such termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor or surety, or both, then existing or that may accrue after termination. All provisions of the Contract Documents that, by their nature, survive final acceptance of the Work must remain in full force and effect after a termination for cause of the Contractor or default of the surety, or both. The Owner may, in its sole discretion, permit the Contractor to continue to perform Work when the Contractor is in default or has been defaulted. Such decision by the Owner in no way operates as a waiver of any of the Owner's rights under the Contract Documents or Performance Bond, nor in the event of a subsequent default, entitle the Contractor or surety to continue to perform or prosecute the Work to completion.

10.2 Termination on Non-Bonded Project: For non-bonded projects, the Owner will follow the termination protocol in Paragraph 10.1

without involving a surety. 10.3 Termination for Convenience of the Owner: Upon fifteen Calendar Days' written notice to the Contractor and surety, or

sooner if reasonable under the circumstances, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, elect to terminate any part of the Work, or the Contract in whole or in part, as the Owner may deem appropriate for its convenience. Upon receipt of any such termination notice, the Contractor must immediately proceed in accordance with any specific instructions, protect and maintain the Work, and make reasonable and diligent efforts to mitigate costs associated with the termination. In such termination, the Contractor must be paid in accordance with the terms of this Contract for only services rendered before the effective date of termination. Upon termination for convenience, the Contractor must be released from any obligation to provide further services and the Owner must have full power and authority to take possession of the Work, assume any agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers that the Owner selects, and prosecute the Work to completion by Contract or as the Owner may deem expedient.

10.4 Termination for Lack of Funding: If expected or actual funding is withdrawn, reduced or limited in any way before the

completion date set forth in this Contract or in any amendment, the State may, upon written notice to the Contractor, terminate this Contract in whole or in part in accordance with Paragraph 10.3.

11. Disputes: All claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of

or relating to the Contract Documents must be submitted in writing to the Professional and otherwise processed and resolved as provided in this Article. The Contractor must carry on the Work with due diligence during all disputes or disagreements. Work must not be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements. The Contractor must exercise reasonable precautions, efforts and measures to avoid situations that would cause delay.

11.1 Notice of Claim: Except for Owner claims for liquidated damages, no claim is valid unless it is based upon written notice

delivered by the claimant to the other party promptly, but in no event later than thirty Calendar Days after the Professional's or Project Director’s determination giving rise to the claim. The notice must state the nature of the dispute, the amount involved, if any, and the remedy sought. The claim submittal with all supporting data must be delivered within sixty Calendar Days after the determination giving rise to the claim (unless the Professional allows an extension). The responsibility to substantiate claims rests with the claimant. A claim by the Contractor must be submitted to the Professional and Project Director for a recommendation or decision from the Professional. A claim by the Owner must be submitted to the Contractor and the


00-19

Professional for a written recommendation or decision by the Professional. The Owner reserves the right to audit any Contractor claim (or claim package) that the Contractor values at more than $50,000.00. Pending final resolution of any claim under this Article, the Contractor must proceed diligently with the Work and comply with any decision of the Owner and/or Professional. For all Contractor claims seeking an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor must submit an affidavit, certifying that the amount claimed accurately reflects any Delay and all costs that the Contractor is entitled from the occurrence of the claimed event and that supporting cost and pricing data are current, accurate, complete and represent the Contractor's best knowledge and belief. The affidavit must be signed in the same manner as required in Item 6 of Section 00100.

11.2 Recommendations or Decisions from the Professional: For claims under $100,000.00, if requested in writing by the

Contractor, the Professional will render a recommendation or decision within thirty Calendar Days after the request and the Owner will issue, if necessary, a determination within thirty Calendar Days after the Professional's recommendation or decision. For claims exceeding $100,000.00, the Professional will issue its recommendation or decision and the Owner, if necessary, will issue its determination, within sixty Calendar Days.

If the Professional denies a Contractor claim or agrees with an Owner claim, that decision must be final and binding on the Contractor, without any determination by the Owner, unless the Contractor files a request for a presentation with the Director-FBSA within thirty Calendar Days. To the extent that any recommendation from the Professional is partly or wholly adverse to a claim from the Owner, that determination must be final and binding on both the Owner and Contractor unless either party files a request for a presentation with the Director-FBSA within thirty Calendar Days. If the Professional recommends payment of any Contractor claim which increases the Contract Price, that recommendation is subject to the Owner’s written approval. In the event any such determination from the Owner is partly or wholly adverse to the preceding recommendation from the Professional, that determination must be final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor files suit in the Michigan Court of Claims within thirty Calendar Days after receipt of such determination. The claim is waived if not made in accordance with these requirements.

If either the Contractor or Owner is not satisfied with any decision of the Professional on a claim, that party must, within thirty Calendar Days of receiving that decision, file a written appeal with complete supporting documentation with the Director-FBSA.. The Director-FBSA has discretion concerning the allowability of evidence submitted, and is not bound to any rules of evidence. If the right to a presentation is waived or if a presentation is conducted and the dispute remains unresolved, the Director-FBSA, at the Director-FBSA’s sole option, must specify in which forum the dispute must be conducted by issuing a written determination to the Contractor that the dispute if the Contractor so elects, be submitted in writing to the Michigan Court of Claims. The Director-FBSA’s determination on the dispute is final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor files a lawful action in the Michigan Court of Claims within thirty Calendar Days after receiving the Director-FBSA’s determination. After settlement or final adjudication of any claim, if payment by the Contractor is not made to the Owner, the Owner may offset the appropriate amounts against (a) payments due to the Contractor under any other Contract between the Owner and the Contractor, or (b) any amounts for which the Owner may be obligated to the Contractor in any capacity. The Director-FBSA may designate someone to fulfill the Director-FBSA’s duties under these terms and conditions.


SECTION 00750 SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS 1. The Work is for the Department of Technology Management and Budget and their special working conditions are included in

Appendix II. Contractor must comply with all security regulations. Access to and egress from the buildings and State Agency grounds must be via routes specifically designated by the State Agency.

2. The Contractor must maintain at all times dust control measures to the satisfaction of the Owner.

3. Contractors shall work as required to maintain the schedule.

END OF SECTION 00750 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1. The following conditions must supplement the general conditions: N/A

END OF SECTION 00800 SECTION 00850 WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE


00-20

The Contractor and all Subcontractors must comply with all Laws pertaining to occupational classifications and to the following requirements: 1. The rates of wages and fringe benefits to be paid to each class of construction mechanics must not be less than the wage and

fringe benefit rates issued by the Michigan Department of Licensing and Regulatory Affairs (DLARA), Wage and Hour Division in its schedule of occupational classification and wage and fringe benefit for the locality in which the Work is to be performed. These prevailing wage rates are included in Appendix IV.

2. The Contractor must keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe

benefit rates as prescribed in the Contract and the address and telephone number of the DLARA’s, Wage and Hour Division office responsible for enforcing these provisions, and must keep an accurate record showing the name and classification of each Person performing Work on the site, the dates on which Work was performed, the hours each Person worked on the site and the actual hourly wage and benefits paid to each Person. This record must be notarized by a Notary Public and must be available to DTMB-FBSA and DLARA for an audit or inspection, at any time, upon their request. In addition, as per section 6.10 of this Document, the Contractor must have available to DTMB and DLARA, certified payroll of those working on the project.

3. If any trade is omitted from the schedule of wages and fringe benefit rates included in Appendix IV, the trades omitted must

also be paid not less than the wage and fringe benefit rates prevailing in the locality in which the Work is to be performed. 4. The Contractor must keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, notice that construction mechanics, as the

intended beneficiaries of 1965 PA 166, as amended, who have not been paid in accordance with the Act may file a claim with the LARA.

A finding by the DLARA that the Contractor or any Subcontractor is in violation of these requirements is final.

END OF SECTION 00850 SECTION 00900 ADDENDA 1. Each Bid submittal must include acknowledgement of receipt and review of all Addenda issued during the Bidding period.



DIVISION 01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


01-1

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 1. General 1.1 General information covering the "Scope of Work" is specified on the Invitation to Bid. Additional information is as follows:

(a). The General Services building has a print room on the north side of the building which is currently conditioned via (2) grade mounted, air cooled, air handling units. The current system has zero redundancy and is at the end of its useful life. The grade mounted units will be replaced with (2) new units mounted indoors on a mezzanine in the north east corner of the print room. Each of the (2) new units are sized to accommodate 100% load during peak heating or cooling providing 100% redundancy. The print room currently has 2x4 suspended ceiling grid at 12’ above finished floor. The ceiling, lights, fire alarm, and fire suppression will need to be modified to accommodate the new mezzanine and equipment.

After the addition of the west restroom group in the 90’s the sanitary piping was broken due to settling which resulted in backups and blockages. A sanitary pump station was added specifically for this restroom group as a temporary fix in order to maintain usage of the facilities. A new sanitary system lateral will be installed on the north side of the building to convey waste from the west restroom group to the sanitary main on the east side of the building. The existing restroom sanitary will need to be exposed, repaired, and rerouted out the north end wall to tie in to the new sanitary lateral.

1.2 The Agency will provide the following Work: (a) State Salvage: The State reserves the right to salvage certain items and equipment and those salvaged items will be

identified to the Bidder at the time of their inspection of the proposed Work. The State will remove salvaged items before commencement of the Work.

(b) Moving Furnishings and Equipment: The Contractor must give timely notice to the State Agency representative identified

in the pre-construction meeting of all movable equipment that will interfere with the Work or which the Contractor cannot protect with coverings of paper, plastic, drop cloths or clean tarpaulin.


SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES 1. Allowances 1.1 Provisional/Contingency Allowances: (a) Bidders must include in their Base Proposal Sum a contingency allowance of $45,000.00 The base bid shall include bonds

and insurance on the value of the allowance. (b) Monies will be used in the contingency allowance only if directed in writing by the Project Director and Professional. (c) Payments under a Provisionary Allowance will include not only the purchase/furnished cost of the materials and

equipment involved, but also all related labor costs, subcontract costs, construction equipment costs, general conditions costs and Fee, provided they are calculated in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.

(c ) Unused allowances will be deducted from the contract amount through contract change order.

END OF SECTION 01020 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1. Schedule of Values: If required, before the construction start date, the Contractor must submit a Schedule of Values to the

Professional for review and approval, of the various tasks that must be performed to complete all the Work. The schedule must show each task and the corresponding value of the task, including separate monies allocated for General Condition items and Project close-out. The aggregate total value for all tasks must be equal to the total Contract sum.


SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES 1. Use of Alternates: Determination of the lowest three Bidders shall be on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and any additive

and deductive Alternates the Owner accepts, in the order in which they are listed only. The Owner will accept an Alternate only if all other previously listed Alternates are also accepted, unless acceptance by the Owner of Alternates in a different order does not affect determination of the lowest three bidders in any way.


01-2

2. Execution: (a) Coordinate pertinent related Work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the Project for each alternate.

(b) Description of Alternates: Alternate No. 1: Alternate No. 2: Alternate No. 3:

END OF SECTION 01030 SECTION 01040 COORDINATION 1. Project Coordination:

(a) Before beginning Work the Contractor must coordinate with the State Agency representative to implement the schedule for the Project. Once the Project is started, it must be carried to completion without delay.(b)Any building utility service interruptions or outages including security required by the Contractor in performing the Work must be prearranged with the staff of the State Agency and must occur only during those scheduled times.(c) The Contractor is not responsible for removing room furnishings unless is required by the Contract Documents.

2. Cutting and Patching:

(a) The Contractor must do all cutting, fitting or patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts fit together

properly or make new Work join with the existing structure. The Contractor must take proper precautions so as not to endanger any existing Work. The Contractor must not cut or alter existing structural members or foundations unless specifically required by the Contract Documents.

(b) Holes or openings cut in exterior walls and roofs for installation of materials or equipment must be waterproofed by appropriate, approved materials and methods.

(c) All adjacent finished surfaces that are damaged by the new Work must be patched with materials matching existing surfaces. Joints between patched and existing material must be straight, smooth and flush. Workers skilled in its installation must apply all patching material.


SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING

1. When applicable, the Contractor must employ a surveyor who must establish and maintain all lines and levels required for laying out and constructing the Work. The Contractor agrees to assume all responsibility due to inaccuracy of any Work of the surveyor, and including incorrect bench marks, their loss or disturbance. Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor must submit two copies of site layout Drawings prepared for the Project and certified by the surveyor.

2. Contractor to stake all new eyebrow, back-in and barrier free sites for the owner to review before excavation to begin. All electrical pedestals will be staked for owner approval of location. Locations on drawings are diagrammatic and give the general locations.


SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. Laws: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with all Federal, State and local Laws applicable to the

Work and site. 2. Codes: All Works must be provided in accordance with the State Construction Code Act, 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL

125.1501 et seg,, International Building and Residential Codes and all applicable Michigan construction codes and fire safety including but not limited to: Michigan Building Code, Michigan Residential Code, Michigan Uniform Energy Code, Michigan Electrical Code, Michigan Rehabilitation Code for Existing Buildings, Michigan Mechanical Code, Michigan Elevator Code and Michigan Plumbing Code. If the Contractor observes that any Contract Document conflicts with any Laws or the State Construction Code or any permits in any respect, the Contractor must promptly notify the Professional in writing. If the Contractor provides any Work knowing or having to reason to know of such conflict, the Contractor must be responsible for that performance.

3. Permits: All required construction permits must be secured and their fees including inspection costs must be paid by the

Contractor. The time incurred by the Contractor in obtaining construction permits must constitute time required to complete the Work and does not justify any increases to the Contract Time or Price, except when revisions to the Drawings and/or


01-3

Specifications required by the permitting authority cause the Delays. The Contractor must pay all charges of Public Utilities for connections to the Work, unless otherwise provided by Cash Allowances specific to those connections. All permit fees will be by the contractor.

4. Taxes: The Contractor must pay all Michigan sales and use taxes and any other similar taxes covering the Work that are

currently imposed by legislative enactment and as administered by the Michigan Department of Treasury, Revenue Division. If the Contractor is not required to pay or bear the burden or obtains a refund of any taxes deemed to have been included in the Bid and Contract Price, the Contract Price must be reduced by a like amount and that amount, whether as a refund or otherwise, must ensure solely to the benefit of the State of Michigan.

5. Safety and Protection: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with all applicable Federal, State and

local Laws governing the safety and protection of persons or property, including, but not limited to the Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Act (MIOSHA), 1974 PA 154, as amended, MCL 408.1001 et seg., and all rules promulgated under the Act. The Contractor is responsible for all damages, injury or loss to the Work, materials, equipment, fines, penalties as a result of any violation of such Laws, except when it’s due to the fault of the Drawings or Specifications or to the Act, error or omission of the Owner or Professional. The Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs and such responsibility must continue until such time as the Professional is satisfied that the Work, or Work inspected, is completed and ready for final payment. In doing the Work and/or in the event of using explosives, the Contractor must take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and must erect and maintain all necessary safeguards and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) all employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work, (b) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, whether stored on or off the site, and (c) other property at or adjacent to the site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement. In the event of severe weather, the Contractor must inspect the Work and the site and take all reasonably necessary actions and precautions to protect the Work and ensure that public access and safety are maintained.

6. Fire Hazard Conditions: (a). The fire hazard classification of finish materials where used in the specification must be in accordance with the current

Michigan Building Code. (b) Classification must be determined by tunnel test in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-255),

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM E-84) or Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL-723). 7. Michigan Right-To-Know Law: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with MIOSHA, Michigan Right-

to-Know Law (Public Act 80 of 1986) and the rules promulgated under it. The Act places certain requirements on employers to develop a communication program designed to safeguard the handling of hazardous chemicals through labeling of chemical containers and development and availability of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and to provide training for employees who work with these chemicals and develop a written hazard communications program. The Act also provides for specific employee rights, including the right to be notified of the location of MSDS and to be notified at the site of new or revised MSDS within five Business Days after receipt and to request MSDS copies from their employers. The Contractor, employer or Subcontractor must post and update these notices at the site.

8. Environmental Requirements: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with all applicable Federal, State

and local environmental Laws, standards, orders or requirements including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, as amended, Michigan Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act, P.A. 451 of 1994, as amended, the Clean Air Act, as amended, the Clean Water Act, as amended, the Safe Drinking Water Act, as amended, Pollution Prevention Act, as amended, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, as amended, National Historic Preservation Act, as amended and Energy Policy and Conservation Act and Energy Standards for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-1999.

9. Nondiscrimination: For all State Contracts for goods or services in amount of $5,000 or more, or for Contracts entered into

with parties employing three or more employees; in connection with the performance of Work under this Contract, the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers must comply with the following requirements:

9.1 Not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, national origin, age, sex,

height, weight or marital status and take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and the employees are not subject to such discrimination. Such action must include, but is not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training.

9.2 To state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment

without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, age, sex, height, weight or marital status.


01-4

9.3 To send, or have its collective bargaining representative send, each labor union or representative of workers with which there is a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor unions or workers' representative of the commitments under this provision.

9.4 To comply with the Elliot-Larsen Civil Rights Act, 1976 PA 453, as amended , MCL 37.2201 et seq.; the Michigan Persons With

Disability Civil Rights Act, 1976 PA 220, as amended, MCL 37.1101 et Seq.; and all published rules, regulations, directives, and orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission (MCRC) which may be in effect on or before the date of Bid opening.

9.5 The Contractor must furnish and file compliance reports within the times, and using the forms prescribed by the MCRC.

Compliance report forms may also elicit information as to the practices, policies, programs, and employment statistics of the Contractor and Subcontractors. The Contractor must permit access to Records by the MCRC and its agent for purposes of ascertaining compliance with the Contract and with rules, regulations, and orders of the MCRC.

9.6 If, after a hearing held under its rules, the MCRC finds that the Contractor has not complied with the nondiscrimination

requirements of the Contract Documents, MCRC may, as part of its order, certify its findings to the Administrative Board of the State of Michigan, which may order the cancellation of the Contract and/or declare the Contractor ineligible for future contracts with the State until the Contractor complies with the MCRC’s order.

10. Michigan Residency for Employees: Fifty percent of the persons employed on the Work by the Contractor must have been

residents of the State of Michigan for not less than one year before beginning employment on the Work. This residency requirement may be reduced or waived to the extent that Michigan residents are not available or to the extent necessary to comply with the federal funds used for the Project. This requirement does not apply to employers who are signatories to collective bargaining agreements that allow for the portability of employees on an interstate basis.


SECTION 01090 REFERENCES 1. References will be made in an abbreviated alpha numeric form to specific standard specifications, reference publications and

building codes of federal or state agencies, manufacturers, associations or trade organizations. Such references will be identified by the alphabetic abbreviation which identifies the government agency, the association or organization followed by the rule, section or detail number that are to form a part of these specifications, the same as if fully set forth herein, and must be of latest issued date in effect three months before the Bid opening date shown on the Proposal and Contract. The abbreviations used are referred to as follows:

Abbreviation Agency, Association or Organization AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society CS Commercial Standard F/M Factory Mutual Research Corporation FS Federal Specifications MDOT Michigan Department of Transportation NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratory, Inc NSWMA National Solid Waste Management Association PCA Portland Cement Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

END OF SECTION 01090 SECTION 01100 PROJECT PROCEDURES 1. Signage and Safety: The Contractor must post appropriate construction signs to advise the occupants and visitors of occupied

facilities of the limits of construction work areas, hardhat areas, excavations, construction parking and staging areas, etc. Advertising signage by contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers is not allowed. The Contractor must maintain safe and adequate pedestrian and vehicular access to fire hydrants, commercial and industrial establishments, churches, schools, parking lots, hospitals, fire and police stations and like establishments. The Contractor must obtain written approval from the Owner ten Calendar Days before connecting to existing facilities or interrupting the services on site.


01-5

2. Barrier and Enclosures: (a) The Contractor must furnish, install and maintain as long as necessary and remove when no longer required adequate

barriers, warning signs or lights at all dangerous points throughout the Work for protection of property, workers and the public. The Contractor must hold the State of Michigan harmless from damage or claims arising out of any injury or damage that may be sustained by any person or persons as a result of the Work under the Contract.

END OF SECTION 01100 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS

1. Pre-Construction Conferences: The Project Director will schedule a pre-construction conference to be attended by the Professional, State Agency staff, and the Contractors. A project procedure as outlined in Form DTMB-0460, will be established for the Work during the pre-construction meeting. When no organizational meeting is called, the Contractor, before beginning any Work, must meet with the staff of the Agency and arrange a Work schedule for the Project. Once the Project has been started, the Contractor must carry it to completion without delay.

2. Progress Meetings: The Professional will schedule progress meetings to be held on the job site whenever needed to supply

information necessary to prevent job interruptions, to observe the Work or to inspect completed Work. The Contractor must be represented at each progress meeting by persons with full authority to act for the Contractor in regard to all portions of the Work.


SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS

1. Shop Drawings, Samples and Technical Submittals: . 1.1 Contractor’s Review: Before each submission, the Contractor must:

(a) determine and verify all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, instructions for installation and handling of equipment and systems, installation requirements (including location, dimensions, access, fit, completeness, etc.), materials, color, catalog numbers and other similar data as to correctness and completeness, and (b) have reviewed and coordinated that technical Submittal with other technical submittals and the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2 Notice of Variation: The Contractor must give the Professional specific written notice of any variation from the requirements

of the Contract Documents. 1.3 Contractor’s Approval: The Contractor shall not submit unapproved submittals. Each submittal shall be stamped/certified to

indicate that the submittal satisfies the requirements of the Contract Documents before submission to the Professional. 1.4 Responsibility and Authority: Neither the Owner’s authority to review any of the Submittals by the Contractor, nor the

Owner’s decision to raise or not to raise any objections about the Submittals, creates or imposes any duty or responsibility on the Owner to exercise any such authority or decision for the benefit of the Contractor/Subcontractor/Supplier, any surety to any of them or any other third party. The Contractor is not relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings, product data, samples, or similar submittals just because the Professional approved them.

1.5 Final As-Built/Record Documents and Submittals: The approved Submittals are a part of the final As-Built/Record

Documents required for processing final payment to the Contractor. 1.6 Submissions: Contractor must submit to the Professional:

(a) A 3-inch wide by 2-inch high clear space for State approval stamp must be provided on the Title Sheet of the shop drawings;

(b) all required samples; and (c) all other technical submittals (test, results, test and safety procedures, O&M manuals, etc.) that are required by the

Contract Documents 1.7 Professional’s Review and Return: Submittals will be returned to the Contractor within fifteen Calendar Days. The

Contractor is responsible for any time Delay and any cost incurred by the Professional, Contractor or Subcontractors/Suppliers as a result of resubmissions and re-reviews of a particular Submittal. The Contractor shall revise and correct submittals returned for revision and resubmittal until approval by the Professional is achieved. Time consumed by resubmissions and reviews of a particular submittal


01-6

2. Progress Schedule: Upon request, the Contractor must submit (7) seven copies of the Progress Schedule for the Professional and Owner review. The Progress Schedule Submittals are intended to show:

(a) the priority and sequencing by which the Contractor intends to execute the Work (or Work remaining) to comply with

Contract Times, those sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents; (b) how the Contractor anticipates foreseeable events, site conditions and all other general, local and prevailing conditions

that may in any manner affect cost, progress, schedule, performance and furnishing of the Work; and (c) how the Means and Methods chosen by the Contractor translate into activities and sequencing; and (d) the actual timing and sequencing of completed Work.

Contractor must resolve the issues arising from the review by the Professional and/or the Owner and submit Progress Schedule Revision. The review of the Progress Schedule by the Professional or the Owner does not create or impose on the Owner or the Professional any responsibility for the timing, planning, scheduling or execution of the Work or the correctness of any such Progress Schedule detail. The Contractor must update the schedule monthly. The correctness of Progress Schedule remains the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall deliver shop drawings of products, materials, assemblies, or equipment to the

Professional as listed in the specifications.

2. Samples: The Contractor must deliver all samples of material or equipment to the job site for examination by the State

Agency and the Professional. Samples will be examined by the Professional for conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor must furnish all Work in accordance with approved samples. The following general classifications of material and equipment require submission of samples. Samples of other items may be requested by the Professional at any time.

Item of Work Type of Sample Section Number Aggregate 23A 312000

END OF SECTION 01300 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL

1. Testing Laboratory Services: All tests required by the Owner must fulfill ASTM, ANSI, Commercial and other Standards for testing. The Contractor must submit a minimum of three copies of each test report to the Professional for evaluation and subsequent distribution. The following general classifications of Work require submission of test reports and/or certificates of inspection. Additional submissions may be requested by the Professional at any time.

Item of Work Test Type Section Number Earthwork Compaction and Density 312000

2. Tests:

(a) Paid by Contractor

END OF SECTION 01400 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

1. The Contractor must furnish and install all temporary facilities and controls required by the Work, must remove them from State property upon completion of the Work, and the grounds and existing facilities must be restored to their original condition.

2. If water or electricity is available in the area where Work will be performed, the Contractor will not be charged for reasonable

use of these services for construction operation. The Contractor must pay costs for installation and removal of any temporary connections including necessary safety devices and controls. Use of services must not disrupt or interfere with operations of the State Agency.

3. Temporary Sanitary Facilities:


01-7

(a) State Toilets: If available, the State Agency will designate a permanent toilet facility on the premises for use by personnel employed in the Work. The Contractor must repair any damage to the toilet facility caused by their employees and maintain it in a clean and sanitary condition.

4. Field Office:

(a) On Site Trailer: At the beginning of the Work, the Contractor may provide a field office and storage building at the site in

a location acceptable to the Owner. The building may be a trailer. The Contractor may provide such other temporary buildings as he may require for the use of workers and safe storage for tools and materials. Job signs with the Contractor’s name, logos, specialty, etc., are not allowed.


SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

1. The Contractor must furnish and be responsible for all materials, equipment, facilities, tools, supplies and utilities necessary for completing the Work. All materials and equipment must be provided as described in the Contract Documents and of good quality, free of defect and new and must be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned following the manufacturer’s and Suppliers’ instructions.

2. Delivery, Storage, and Handling: All materials and equipment delivered to and used in the Work must be suitably stored and

protected from the elements. The areas used for storage must only be those approved by the State Agency. The Owner assumes no responsibility for stored material. The ownership and title to materials will not be vested in the Owner before materials are incorporated in the Work, unless payment is made by the Owner for stored materials and equipment. After delivery, before and after installation, the Contractor must protect materials and equipment against theft, injury or damage from all causes. For all materials and equipment, the Contractor must provide complete information on installation, operation and preventive maintenance.

(a) The Contractor must cover and protect bulk materials while in storage which are subject to deterioration because of

dampness, the weather or contamination. The Contractor must keep materials in their original sealed containers, unopened, with labels plainly indicating manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade of material and must immediately remove from the Work site containers which are broken, opened, watermarked and/or contain caked, lumpy or otherwise damaged materials.

(b) The Contractor must keep equipment stored outdoors from contact with the ground, away from areas subject to flooding

and covered with weatherproof plastic sheeting or tarpaulins.

(b) The Contractor must certify that any materials stored off-site are:

a) Stored on property owned or leased by the Contractor or owned by the agency. b) Insured against loss by fire, theft, flood or other hazards. c) Properly stored and protected against loss or damage. d) In compliance with the plans and specifications. e) Specifically allotted, identified, and reserved for the project. f) Itemized for tracking and payment. g) Subject to these conditions until the items are delivered to the project site.


SECTION 01650 FACILITY START-UP

1. Tests: The complete installation consisting of the several parts of equipment and systems installed according to the requirements of the Contract Documents must be ready in all respects for use by the State Agency and must be subjected to a test at full operating conditions and pressures for normal conditions of use.

2. Adjustments: Contractor must adjust and replace the Work which is necessary to fulfill the requirements of the Contract

Documents and to comply with the directions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the several parts of equipment, and to comply with all provisions of architectural and/or engineering drawings/specifications and all codes and regulations which may apply to the entire installation.

3. Demonstration: Contractor must provide an on-site demonstration and training of all systems operations to the Owner when

it is substantially completed.



01-8

SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT

1. Substantial Completion: The Contractor must notify the Professional, the Project Director and the Agency when the Work will be substantially complete. If the Professional, Owner, and Agency agree that the project is Substantially Complete, the Professional and Project Director will inspect the Work. The Professional, upon determining that the Work, or a portion of the Work inspected, is substantially complete, will prepare a Punch List and will attach it to the respective Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Contractor must be represented on the job site at the time this inspection is made and thereafter must complete all Work by the date set for final acceptance by the Owner.

2. Cleaning:

(a) Regular Cleaning: The Contractor must remove all scrap or removed material, debris or rubbish from the Project work

site at the end of each working day and more frequently whenever the Owner Field Representative deems such material to be a hazard. The Contractor cannot discard materials on the grounds of the State Agency without the express permission of the Project Director. No salvage or surplus material may be sold on the premises of the State Agency. No burning of debris or rubbish is allowed. Any recycled materials must be recycled and the Contractor will be required to provide recycling plan.

(b) Final Cleaning: Before final acceptance by the State, the Contractor must clean all of the Work and existing surfaces,

building elements and contents that were soiled by their operations and make repairs for any damage or blemish that was caused by the Work.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity.

C. Pre-demolition photographs.

D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged.



1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. Modular office partitions and furniture.

b. Materials related to space usage in the area of work 1) Pallets, boxes, etc.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.



d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:



1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.


A. Material certificates.

B. Material test reports.

C. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.



1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 35 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:



1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, Type II, or Type I/II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 15 mils (0.25 mm) thick.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.



2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 25 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Normal-Weight Concrete:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.48. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of

2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content a. Exterior Concrete: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery. b. Interior Concrete: Not more than 4.5 percent at point of delivery.

2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.11 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).



3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm).

C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after



loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.


1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.


A. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.

B. Construction: Braced frame.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS


B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex or round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Finish: Plain.



D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Finish: Plain.

E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Finish: Plain.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. Primer shall be Gray in color.

2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.



3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 4. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs as required for specified welds, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.



B. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections.


A. Product Data: For the following:

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304

E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

G. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741.

H. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.



1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90

(Z275) coating; 0.108-inch (2.8-mm) nominal thickness.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical adhesive anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.



D. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate.

E. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts.



F. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve.

G. Prime bollards with primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

2.6 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning.

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.



Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with adhesive anchor bolts . Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.

C. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout.

D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

E. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.



3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 1

SECTION 055119 - METAL GRATING STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes industrial-type, straight-run stairs with steel-grating treads and railings attached to metal grating stairs.


A. Product Data: For metal grating stairs.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Cast-Abrasive Nosings: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Weld connections to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.



C. Fabricate joints that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Industrial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.

C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

1. Fabricate treads and platforms from pressure-locked steel grating with openings in gratings no more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.

2. Surface: Plain. 3. Finish: Shop primed. 4. Fabricate grating treads with cast-abrasive nosing and with steel angle or steel plate

carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.

2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."

1. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings.

2. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise



indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

B. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.




PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe railings.


1. Section 055112 "Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs.



1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.


A. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.



2.2 STEEL AND IRON


B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Chemical adhesive anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting,"Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."



E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

E. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

F. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

B. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

3.2 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, and to resist required loads, connected to posts and to metal supporting members. Submit connection method on shop drawings for engineer review of connection.

3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



BAR GRATINGS 055313 - 1

SECTION 055313 - BAR GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal bar gratings and metal frames and supports for gratings.



1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

B. Pressure-Locked Steel Grating: Fabricated by pressing rectangular flush-top crossbars into slotted bearing bars.

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) o.c. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches (102 mm) o.c. 5. Traffic Surface: Plain. 6. Steel Finish: Shop primed.

2.2 FERROUS METALS


B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205).



F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Adhesive chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

C. Shop prime gratings, and frames unless otherwise indicated.



D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning”.

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

C. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.

C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.




FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels, patching former wall openings.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.


A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient, material surfaces.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.



2.2 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weather-tight installation.

B. Deep-Box-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, box-shaped ribs, evenly spaced across panel width, and with rib/recess sides angled to match existing. 1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.034 inch. b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: Match existing adjoining panels..

2. Rib Spacing: Match existing.. 3. Panel Coverage: Match existing.. 4. Panel Height: Match existing..


A. Miscellaneous Metal Sub-framing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyolefin-foam

or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or pre-molded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weather-tight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.



D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are non-staining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

B. Watertight Installation:

1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and

fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On



completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION 074213.13


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413.

C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68mm)(22 gage). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.



3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm).

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide asphalt saturated organic felt or foam gasket..

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.



B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.



4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with the support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. G-P Gypsum. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:



a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. L-Bead: L-shaped; Exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (control) joint.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:



1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 – INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior and exterior substrates.

1. Concrete. 2. Steel and iron. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.




A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 25 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Exterior and Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).

2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).

3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).

4. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).

5. Sherwin-Williams Company (Sherwin-Williams).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.



C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE INTERIOR PAINTING: A. Existing concrete floor slab

1. Safety yellow egress aisle paint

a. 2 coats: PPG Break Through 250 Satin Waterborne Acrylic V70-46 Safety Yellow B. New mech mezzanine steel access stair and pipe rails

1. Safety yellow paint

a. Primer: PPG Devoe Devflex Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 4020PF b. Finish: 2 coats: PPG Devguard Coatings Devflex High Performance Waterborne Acrylic

Semi-Gloss Enamel 4216HP

C. New prime painted steel mezzanine framing 1. Color to match an existing Platform

a. Touch-up: PPG Devoe Devflex Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 4020PF b. Finish: PPG Devguard Coatings Devflex High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-

Gloss Enamel 4216HP

D. New Gypsum Board

1. Bulkheads created for perimeter of mezzanine ceiling

a. Primer: PPG Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6-2.



b. Finish: 2 coats: PPG Monarch Builder's Spec® Pro Interior Flat Wall & Ceiling Latex Paint 15-1110 Series.

EXTERIOR PAINTING: A. Existing fluoropon-finished metal siding

1. Touch up painting damaged by removal of mechanical equipment and rework of openings in wall at former duct penetrations

a. Primer: PPG CoraflonTM ADS Epoxy Bonding Primer ADS510 Series



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.



2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."



3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

2. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

3. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 2

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass

finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Fastener systems.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.



2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.



D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

F. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

G. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.



1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 6. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.



H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

I. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

J. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:


IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Sanitary Waste Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety gray. b. Letter Color: White.



FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 1

SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure and pressure couplings. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Encasement for piping. 5. Manholes.


A. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewer system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:



1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.2 NONPRESSURE-TYPE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C, rubber. 3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:

1. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

1. Top-Loading Classification(s): Light Duty and Medium Duty. 2. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet or tube.

D. Color: Black or natural.



2.5 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as

required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for

walls and base riser section; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, of length to provide depth indicated. 6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated; with top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection. 9. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches.

10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings, with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, with diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser, with 4-inch-minimum-width flange and 26-inch-diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete complying with ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.



C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: 4 percent.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent unless otherwise indicated.



2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install piping with 48-inch minimum cover. 4. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 5. Install PVC Type PSM sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

F. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321. 2. Join PVC Type PSM sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for

elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints. 3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

E. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install manhole-cover inserts in frame and immediately below cover.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts, and use cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas.

2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas.



B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes.

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

manholes.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test.



5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following:

a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot head of water, and maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes.

b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 2. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.



C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 2. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1173. b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear

ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

c. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1460.



b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.



J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

L. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

M. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

N. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

C. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.



3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.



3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.



2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints. 3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints. 3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.



C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints. 3. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

E. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; coupled joints. 3. Solid-wall PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing. 4. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 5. Clamping Device: Not required. 6. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 7. Closure: Plastic plug. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Plastic with threads. 9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.



11. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected

piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation

frame and cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.



3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING 230130.51 - 1

SECTION 230130.51 - HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system components.


A. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for fibrous-glass ducts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

B. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in HVAC Systems" Section.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006.

B. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.

C. Systems and Components to Be Cleaned:

1. Air devices for supply and return air. 2. Air-terminal units. 3. Ductwork:

a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes, to the air-handling unit. b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit. c. Exhaust-air ducts.

D. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process.



E. Particulate Collection:

1. For particulate collection equipment, include adequate filtration to contain debris removed. Locate equipment downwind and away from all air intakes and other points of entry into the building.

2. HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for particles sized 0.3 micrometer or larger shall be used where the particulate collection equipment is exhausting inside the building,

F. Control odors and mist vapors during the cleaning and restoration process.

G. Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices inside the system prior to cleaning. Restore them to their marked position on completion of cleaning.

H. System components shall be cleaned so that all HVAC system components are visibly clean. On completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to cleaning operations.

I. Clean all air-distribution devices, registers, grilles, and diffusers.

J. Duct Systems:

1. Create service openings in the HVAC system as necessary to accommodate cleaning. 2. Mechanically clean duct systems specified to remove all visible contaminants so that the

systems are capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see NADCA ACR 2006).

K. Debris removed from the HVAC system shall be disposed of according to applicable Federal, state, and local requirements.

L. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Source-Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall be cleaned using source-removal mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the HVAC system and to safely remove these contaminants from the facility. No cleaning method, or combination of methods, shall be used that could potentially damage components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.

a. Use continuously operating vacuum-collection devices to keep each section being cleaned under negative pressure.

b. Cleaning methods that require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris that is adhered to interior surfaces of HVAC system components shall be equipped to safely remove these devices. Cleaning methods shall not damage the integrity of HVAC system components or damage porous surface materials such as duct and plenum liners.

2. Cleaning Mineral-Fiber Insulation Components:

a. Fibrous-glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in equipment or ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment while the



HVAC system is under constant negative pressure and shall not be permitted to get wet according to NADCA ACR 2006.

b. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous-glass components and will render the system capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see NADCA ACR 2006).

c. Fibrous materials that become wet shall be discarded and replaced.

3.3 RESTORATION

A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and components according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.

B. Comply with Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for duct materials, accessories, and hardware required for Work of this Section.

C. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.

D. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall have removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 1

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.



2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Interior Partitions:



a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 1

SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d. Bare Piping at Wall Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 2

e. Bare Piping at Wall Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.

i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass

finish. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.12 - 1

SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

D. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.



2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. One-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Bronze. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Reduced.

B. Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

C. Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Regular Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.



j. Port: Regular.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.3 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: One piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.

1. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

3.4 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

3.5 LOW-PRESSURE STEAM VALVE SCHEDULE (15 PSIG OR LESS)


3.6 STEAM-CONDENSATE VALVE SCHEDULE



CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.14 - 1

SECTION 230523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze lift check valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:



1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE.

C. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

D. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE.

2.3 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.



c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Composition. g. Seat Ring: Bronze. h. Disc Holder: Bronze. i. Disc: PTFE. j. Gasket: Asbestos free.

C. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.4 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. h. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring.



PART 3 - EXECUTION






E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules.


A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.



3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 1: Class 125, lever and spring.



1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.



2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.

3.6 LOW-PRESSURE STEAM VALVE SCHEDULE (15 PSIG OR LESS)


1. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.



2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, metal seats. 3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.



1. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.



2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, metal seats. 3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.



GATE VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.15 - 1

SECTION 230523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze gate valves. 2. Iron gate valves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

F. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.



2.2 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

B. Class 150, NRS, Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.3 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 250, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged.



e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION






3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Gate valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends, except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends, except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.


A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze Valves, Class 125, NRS with soldered ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron Gate Valves, Class 125, NRS.




A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze Valves, Class 125, NRS with soldered ends.


3.6 LOW-PRESSURE STEAM VALVE SCHEDULE (15 PSIG) OR LESS)

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze Gate Valves, Class 150, NRS.



A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze Gate Valves, Class 150, NRS.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.






A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

C. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.



2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:



1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING




1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting".

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.



8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.



N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548.13 - 1

SECTION 230548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Open-spring isolators. 5. Housed-spring isolators. 6. Restrained-spring isolators. 7. Housed-restrained-spring isolators. 8. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 9. Resilient pipe guides. 10. Elastomeric hangers. 11. Spring hangers.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:

1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 4. Surface Pattern: Smooth pattern. 5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



1. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure.

2. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.

2.3 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:

1. Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.4 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.

2.5 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:



deformation or failure.



5. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt.

2.6 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:

1. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without


2.7 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:

1. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.






2.8 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions.

2.9 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.10 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.

2.11 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.



8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.



IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.



6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Red.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.



C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.4 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Blue.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.



3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-blue background. 2. Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background. 3. Low-Pressure Steam Piping: White letters on a safety-purple background. 4. Steam Condensate Piping: White letters on a safety-gray background.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

F. TDH: Total dynamic head.


A. LEED Submittals:

1. Air-Balance Report for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that work complies with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

2. TAB Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that work complies with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Certified TAB reports.




A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB as a TAB

technician.

B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.



G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

K. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows.

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. b. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. f. Ceilings are installed. g. Windows and doors are installed. h. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed. c. Water treatment is complete. d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged. e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.



g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. h. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.



J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.



1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and manufacturer-recommended testing procedures.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing as follows:

1. Check flow-control valves for proper position. 2. Check that air has been purged from the system.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

1. Measure total water flow.

a. Position valves for full flow through coils. b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or exchanger

pressure drop.

B. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows.

1. Measure flow at terminals. 2. Adjust each terminal to design flow. 3. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. 4. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design

flow. 5. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

E. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:



1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

F. Verify final system conditions as follows:

1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 2. Mark final settings.

G. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.

3.9 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address.



8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters.



2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.



j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm.



i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.

I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.

J. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.10 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager.

B. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

C. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.



D. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, design professional may contact AABC Headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." 2. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.



D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.



4. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. 5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 6. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.



B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.



4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

2.10 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.



G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.



B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.



6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

3.6 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.



3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

D. Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

E. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

F. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

G. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.10 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE



HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Chilled-water piping, indoors. 2. Heating hot-water piping, indoors.


1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.



C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 4. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL]: Comply with

ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 1290, Type I.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory-applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.





C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.



D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.



E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.



2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.



1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray. 5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when



B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White. 5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when



2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.



3. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 2. Color: White. 3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

C. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

D. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.



2. Thickness: 6 mils. 3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 500 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

C. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 4. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.



E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.



O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:



1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.




1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.




1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.




1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of



flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water and Brine, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. 2. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 3. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or Pipe Insulation Wicking System: 1 inch thick.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.

3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.



CONTROL VALVES 230923.11 - 1

SECTION 230923.11 - CONTROL VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control valves and actuators for DDC systems.


1. Section 230923 "Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC" control equipment and software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire, and cable.

2. Section 230993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to Section 230923.11.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

D. Determine control valve sizes and flow coefficients by ISA 75.01.01.

E. Control valve characteristics and rangeability shall comply with ISA 75.11.01.

F. Selection Criteria:



1. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Chilled Water: Last position. b. Heating Hot Water: Last position. c. Steam: Close.

2. Minimum Cv shall be calculated at 10 percent of design flow, with a coincident pressure differential equal to the system design pump head.

3. In water systems, select modulating control valves at terminal equipment for a design Cv based on a pressure drop of 5 psig at design flow unless otherwise indicated.

4. Modulating valve sizes for steam service shall provide a pressure drop at design flow equal to lesser of the following:

a. 50 percent of the valve inlet pressure. b. 50 percent of the absolute steam pressure at the valve inlet.

2.2 BALL-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Ball Valves with Single Port and Characterized Disk:

1. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG. 2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 through NPS 2: Nominal 400 WOG. 3. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig. 4. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F. 5. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B 61, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 584, or forged

brass with nickel plating. 6. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or bronze. 8. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball. b. Blowout-proof design. c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.

9. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE. 10. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain

the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means, such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be demonstrated by testing.

11. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.

B. Ball Valves with Two Ports and Characterized Disk:

1. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG. 2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 through NPS 2: Nominal 400 WOG. 3. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig. 4. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F. 5. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B 61, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 584, or forged

brass with nickel plating.



6. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or bronze. 8. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball. b. Blowout-proof design. c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.

9. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE. 10. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain

the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means, such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be demonstrated by testing.

11. Flow Characteristics for A-Port: Equal percentage. 12. Flow Characteristics for B-Port: Modified for constant common port flow.

C. Pressure-Independent Ball Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Performance:

a. Pressure Rating: 600 psig for NPS 1 and 400 psig for NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2. b. Close-off pressure of 200 psig. c. Process Temperature Range: Between zero to 212 deg F. d. Rangeability: 100 to 1.

2. Integral Pressure Regulator: Located upstream of ball to regulate pressure, to maintain a constant pressure differential while operating within a pressure differential range of 5 to 50 psig.

3. Body: Forged brass, nickel plated, and with threaded ends. 4. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 5. Stem and Stem Extension: Chrome-plated brass, blowout-proof design. 6. Stem sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging field-applied insulation and insulation vapor barrier seal. 7. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE. 8. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring stem seal with threaded packing ring follower

to retain the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means, such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if equivalent cycle endurance can be achieved.

9. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.

2.3 BUTTERFLY-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Commercial-Grade, Two-Way Butterfly Valves:

1. Performance:

a. Bi-directional bubble tight shutoff at 250 psig. b. Comply with MSS SP-67 or MSS SP-68. c. Rotation: Zero to 90 degrees.



d. Linear or modified equal percentage flow characteristic.

2. Body: Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B, ductile iron ASTM A 536 or cast steel ASTM A 216/A 216M WCB fully lugged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5 flanges.

3. Disc: 316 stainless steel. 4. Shaft: 316 or 17-4 PH stainless steel. 5. Seat: Reinforced EPDM or reinforced PTFE with retaining ring. 6. Shaft Bushings: Reinforced PTFE or stainless steel. 7. Replaceable seat, disc, and shaft bushings. 8. Corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. b. Body size. c. Body and trim materials. d. Flow arrow.

B. Commercial-Grade, Three-Way Butterfly Valves:

1. Arrangement: Two valves mated to a fabricated tee with interconnecting mechanical linkage.

2. Performance:

a. Bi-directional bubble tight shutoff at 250 psig. b. Comply with MSS SP-67 or MSS SP-68. c. Rotation: Zero to 90 degrees. d. Linear or modified equal percentage flow characteristic.

3. Body: Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B, ductile iron ASTM A 536 or cast steel ASTM A 216/A 216M WCB fully lugged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5 flanges.

4. Disc: 316 stainless steel. 5. Shaft: 316 or 17-4 PH stainless steel. 6. Seat: Reinforced EPDM or reinforced PTFE seat with retaining ring. 7. Shaft Bushings: Reinforced PTFE or stainless steel. 8. Replaceable seat, disc, and shaft bushings. 9. Corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. b. Body size. c. Body and trim materials. d. Flow arrow.

2.4 GLOBE-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. General Globe-Style Valve Requirements:

1. Globe-style control valve body dimensions shall comply with ISA 75.08.01. 2. Construct the valves to be serviceable from the top. 3. For cage guided valves, trim shall be field interchangeable for different valve flow

characteristics, such as equal percentage, linear, and quick opening.



4. Reduced trim for one nominal size smaller shall be available for industrial valves NPS 1 and larger.

5. Replaceable seats and plugs. 6. Furnish each control valve with a corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating the following:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. b. Body and trim size. c. Arrow indicating direction of flow.

B. Two-Way Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Globe Style: Single port. 2. Body: Cast bronze or forged brass with ASME B16.5, Class 250 rating. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Bonnet: Screwed. 5. Packing: PTFE V-ring. 6. Plug: Top guided. 7. Plug, Seat, and Stem: Brass. 8. Process Temperature Range: 35 to 248 deg F. 9. Ambient Operating Temperature: 35 to 150 deg F. 10. Leakage: FCI 70-2, Class IV. 11. Rangeability: 25 to 1. 12. Equal percentage flow characteristic.

C. Three-Way Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Globe Style: Mix flow pattern. 2. Body: Cast bronze or forged brass with ASME B16.5, Class 250 rating. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Bonnet: Screwed. 5. Packing: PTFE V-ring. 6. Plug: Top guided. 7. Plug, Seat, and Stem: Brass. 8. Process Temperature Range: 35 to 248 deg F. 9. Ambient Operating Temperature: 35 to 150 deg F. 10. Leakage: FCI 70-2, Class IV. 11. Rangeability: 25 to 1. 12. Linear flow characteristic.

D. Two-Way Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6:

1. Globe Style: Single port. 2. Body: Cast iron complying with ASME B61.1, Class 125. 3. End Connections: Flanged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanges. 4. Bonnet: Bolted. 5. Packing: PTFE cone-ring. 6. Plug: Top or bottom guided. 7. Plug, Seat, and Stem: Brass or stainless steel. 8. Process Temperature Rating: 35 to 281 deg F. 9. Leakage: 0.1 percent of maximum flow. 10. Rangeability: Varies with valve size between 6 and 10 to 1.



11. Modified linear flow characteristic.

E. Industrial-Grade Straight-Through Globe Valves NPS 1 and Larger:

1. Globe Style: Single port. 2. Body: Cast iron or cast steel. 3. End Connections for NPS 2: Threaded. 4. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Raised face flanged. 5. Bonnet: Bolted. 6. Packing: PTFE V-ring. 7. Plug: Cage guided and unbalanced. 8. Plug, Seat, and Stem: 416 stainless-steel plug and seat, 17-4 PH stainless-steel cage and

316 stainless-steel stem. 9. Valve Stem: Thread and pin stem to plug. 10. Valve Stem Finish: Polished to 5 microinches rms or less. 11. Plug and Seat Surfaces: Hardened facing. 12. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 450 deg F. 13. Ambient Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 150 deg F. 14. Leakage: FCI 70-2, Class IV. 15. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.

2.5 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Description:

1. Action: Either normally open or normally closed in the event of electrical power failure as required by the application.

2. Size to close against the system pressure. 3. Manual override capable. 4. Heavy-duty assembly. 5. Body: Brass. 6. Seats and Discs: NBR or PTFE. 7. Solenoid Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.6 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE ACTUATORS

A. Actuators for Hydronic Control Valves: Capable of closing valve against system pump shutoff head.

B. Actuators for Steam Control Valves: Shutoff against 1.2 times steam design pressure.

C. Position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator.

D. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

E. Voltage: 24-V ac.

F. Deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled device from limit to limit when operated at rated voltage.



G. Function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate voltage.

H. Construction:

1. For Actuators Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. For Actuators from 100 to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft hardened steel running in bronze, copper alloy or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel or cast-aluminum housing.

3. For Actuators Larger Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

I. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring Return Actuators: Easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field without replacement.

2. Gear Type Actuators: External manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual positioning when the actuator is not powered.

J. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

K. Modulating Actuators:

1. Operation: Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either direction from any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counter-clockwise inputs. One input drives actuator to open position and other input drives actuator to close position. No signal of either input remains in last position.

b. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10- or 2- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA signals.

c. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Actuator drives to a specified position according to pulse duration (length) of signal from a dry contact closure, triac sink, or source controller.

d. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control Input, Position Feedback, and Running Time: Factory or field programmable.

2) Diagnostic: Feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload, mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service Data: Include, at a minimum, number of hours powered and number of hours in motion.

L. Position Feedback:

1. Where indicated, equip two-position actuators with limits switches or other positive means of a position indication signal for remote monitoring of open and close position.

2. Where indicated, equip modulating actuators with a position feedback through current or voltage signal for remote monitoring.



3. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and closed travel limits.

M. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position. 2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power. 3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

N. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions. 2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

O. Valve Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for valve interface, provide an actuator designed to be directly coupled to valve shaft without the need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to valve drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two points of attachment.

P. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

Q. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application. 2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications. 3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications. 4. Provide actuator enclosure with heater and control where required by application.

R. Stroke Time:

1. Operate valve from fully closed to fully open within 15 seconds. 2. Operate valve from fully open to fully closed within 15 seconds. 3. Move valve to failed position within 15 seconds. 4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation.

S. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA. 2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Firestop penetrations made in fire-rated assemblies and seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies.

D. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

E. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

3.2 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

B. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONTROL VALVES

A. Install pipe reducers for valves smaller than line size. Position reducers as close to valve as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Install with manufacturer-recommended clearance.

B. Install flanges or unions to allow drop-in and -out valve installation.

C. Where indicated, install control valve with three-valve bypass manifold to allow for control valve isolation and removal without interrupting system flow by providing manual throttling valve in bypass pipe.

D. Install drain valves in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve installed in a three-valve manifold and for each control valve larger than NPS 2.



E. Install pressure temperature taps in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve larger than NPS 1.

F. Valve Orientation:

1. Where possible, install globe and ball valves installed in horizontal piping with stems upright and not more than 15 degrees off of vertical, not inverted.

2. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. 3. Where possible, install butterfly valves that are installed in horizontal piping with stems

in horizontal position and with low point of disc opening with direction of flow.

G. Clearance:

1. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support of valves that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install valves with at least 12 inches of clear space around valve and between valves and adjacent surfaces.

H. Threaded Valves:

1. Note internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply thread compound to external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is

specified. 4. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Apply wrench on valve end as pipe is being threaded.

I. Flanged Valves:

1. Align flange surfaces parallel. 2. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

J. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

K. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

L. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with valve identification on valve and on face of ceiling directly below valves concealed above ceilings.

3.4 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.



2. Check valves for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check valves for proper installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance. 4. For pneumatic products, verify air supply for each product is properly installed. 5. For pneumatic valves, verify that pressure gauges are provided in each air line to valve

actuator and positioner. 6. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction. 7. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed. 8. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment are secure. 9. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source. 10. Verify that valve ball, disc, and plug travel are unobstructed. 11. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace the valve if leaks persist.

3.5 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed, and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than 30 seconds.

D. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.



CONTROL DAMPERS 230923.12 - 1

SECTION 230923.12 - CONTROL DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control dampers and actuators for DDC systems.


1. Section 230923 "Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC" for control equipment and software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire, and cable.

2. Section 230993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to Section 230923.12.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Schedule and design calculations for control dampers and actuators, including the following.

a. Flow at project design and minimum flow conditions. b. Face velocity at project design and minimum airflow conditions. c. Pressure drop across damper at project design and minimum airflow conditions. d. AMCA 500D damper installation arrangement used to calculate and schedule

pressure drop, as applicable to installation. e. Maximum close-off pressure. f. Leakage airflow at maximum system pressure differential (fan close-off pressure). g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator. h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

D. Selection Criteria:

1. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Supply Air: Open.

2. Select modulating dampers for a pressure drop of 2 percent of fan total static pressure unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 RECTANGULAR CONTROL DAMPERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel blade configuration for two-position control, equipment isolation service, and when mixing two airstreams. For other applications, use opposed blade configuration.

2. Factory assemble multiple damper sections to provide a single damper assembly of size required by the application.

B. Rectangular Dampers with Aluminum Airfoil Blades:

1. Performance:

a. Leakage: AMCA 511, Class 1A. Leakage shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-in. wg differential static pressure.

b. Pressure Drop: 0.05-in. wg at 1500 fpm across a 24-by-24-inch damper when tested according to AMCA 500-D, figure 5.3.

c. Velocity: Up to 6000 fpm. d. Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. e. Pressure Rating: Damper close-off pressure equal to fan shutoff pressure with a

maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length. f. Damper shall have AMCA seal for both air leakage and air performance.

2. Construction:

a. Frame:



1) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 extruded-aluminum profiles,0.07 inch thick.

2) Hat-shaped channel with integral flange(s). Mating face shall be a minimum of 1 inch.

3) Width not less than 5 inches.

b. Blades:

1) Hollow, airfoil, extruded aluminum. 2) Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application. 3) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 aluminum, 0.07 inch thick. 4) Width not to exceed 6 inches. 5) Length as required by close-off pressure, not to exceed 48 inches.

c. Seals:

1) Blades: Replaceable, mechanically attached extruded silicone, vinyl, or plastic composite.

2) Jambs: Stainless steel, compression type.

d. Axles: 0.5-inch-diameter plated or stainless steel, mechanically attached to blades. e. Bearings:

1) Molded synthetic or stainless-steel sleeve mounted in frame. 2) Where blade axles are installed in vertical position, provide thrust bearings.

f. Linkage:

1) Concealed in frame. 2) Constructed of aluminum and plated or stainless steel. 3) Hardware: Stainless steel.

g. Transition:

1) For round and flat oval duct applications, provide damper assembly with integral transitions to mate to adjoining field connection.

2) Factory mount damper in a sleeve with a close transition to mate to field connection.

3) Damper size and sleeve shall be connection size plus 2 inches. 4) Sleeve length shall be not less than 12 inches for dampers without jackshafts

and shall be not less than 16 inches for dampers with jackshafts. 5) Sleeve material shall match adjacent duct.

h. Additional Corrosion Protection for Corrosive Environments:

1) Provide anodized finish for aluminum surfaces in contact with airstream. Anodized finish shall be a minimum of 0.0007 inch thick.

2) Axles, damper linkage, and hardware shall be constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

3. Airflow Measurement:



a. Where indicated, provide damper assembly with integral airflow monitoring. b. Zero- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA scaled output signal for remote monitoring of

actual airflow. c. Accuracy shall be within 5 percent of the actual flow rate between the range of

minimum and design airflow. For applications with a large variation in range between the minimum and design airflow, configure the damper sections and flow measurement assembly as required to comply with the stated accuracy over the entire modulating range.

d. Provide a straightening device as part of the flow measurement assembly to achieve the specified accuracy with configuration indicated.

e. Suitable for operation in untreated and unfiltered air. f. Provide temperature and altitude compensation and correction to maintain

accuracy over temperature range encountered at site altitude. g. Provide automatic zeroing feature.

4. Airflow Control:

a. Where indicated, provide damper assembly with integral airflow measurement and control.

b. A factory-furnished and -calibrated controller shall be programmed, in nonvolatile EPROM, with application-specific airflow set point and range.

c. The controller and actuator shall communicate to control the desired airflow. d. The controller shall receive a zero- to 10-V dc input signal and report a zero- to 20-

mA output signal that is proportional to the airflow. e. Airflow measurement and control range shall be suitable for operation between

150 to 2000 fpm. f. Ambient Operating Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 140 deg F. g. Ambient Operating Humidity Range: 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-

condensing. h. Provide unit with control transformer rated for not less than 85 VA. Provide

transformer with primary and secondary protection and primary disconnecting means. Coordinate requirements with field power connection.

i. Provide screw terminals for interface to field wiring. j. Factory mount electronics within a NEMA 250, Type 1 painted steel enclosure.

2.3 GENERAL CONTROL-DAMPER ACTUATORS REQUIREMENTS

A. Actuators shall operate related damper(s) with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and proper speed of response at velocity and pressure conditions to which the damper is subjected.

B. Actuators shall produce sufficient power and torque to close off against the maximum system pressures encountered. Actuators shall be sized to close off against the fan shutoff pressure as a minimum requirement.

C. The total damper area operated by an actuator shall not exceed 80 percent of manufacturer's maximum area rating.

D. Provide one actuator for each damper assembly where possible. Multiple actuators required to drive a single damper assembly shall operate in unison.



E. Avoid the use of excessively oversized actuators which could overdrive and cause linkage failure when the damper blade has reached either its full open or closed position.

F. Use jackshafts and shaft couplings in lieu of blade-to-blade linkages when driving axially aligned damper sections.

G. Provide mounting hardware and linkages for connecting actuator to damper.

H. Select actuators to fail in desired position in the event of a power failure.

I. Actuator Fail Positions: As indicated below:

1. Supply Air: Open.

2.4 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS

A. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

B. Voltage:

1. 24 V. 2. Actuator shall deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled

device from limit to limit when operated at rated voltage. 3. Actuator shall function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate

voltage.

C. Construction:

1. Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. 100 up to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft-hardened steel running in bronze, copper alloy, or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel, or cast-aluminum housing.

3. Greater Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

D. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring return actuators shall be easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field without replacement.

2. Provide gear-type actuators with an external manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.

E. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

F. Modulating Actuators:

1. Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either direction from any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:



a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counter-clockwise inputs. One input drives actuator to open position, and other input drives actuator to close position. No signal of either input remains in last position.

b. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control input, position feedback, and running time shall be factory or field programmable.

2) Diagnostic feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload, mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service data, including at a minimum, number of hours powered and number of hours in motion.

G. Position Feedback:

1. Equip two-position actuators with limits switches or other positive means of a position indication signal for remote monitoring of open and close position.

H. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position. 2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power. 3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

I. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions. 2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

J. Damper Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for damper interface, provide actuator designed to be directly coupled to damper shaft without need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to damper drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two points of attachment.

K. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

L. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application. 2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications.



3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications. 4. Provide actuator enclosure with a heater and controller where required by application.

M. Stroke Time:

1. Operate damper from fully closed to fully open within 15 seconds. 2. Operate damper from fully open to fully closed within 15 seconds. 3. Move damper to failed position within 15 seconds. 4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation. 5. Actuators operating in smoke control systems comply with governing code and NFPA

requirements.

N. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA. 2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTROL-DAMPER APPLICATIONS

A. Control Dampers:

B. Select from damper types indicated in "Control Dampers" Article to achieve performance requirements and characteristics indicated while subjected to full range of system operation encountered.

1. Rectangular Supply Air Duct Applications with SMACNA Construction Class <Insert value> and Velocities to <Insert value>: Rectangular dampers with aluminum airfoil blades.


A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Properly support dampers and actuators, tubing, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment when subjected to a <Insert valve> force.

C. Seal penetrations made in fire-rated and acoustically rated assemblies.

D. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, or other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.



E. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

3.3 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers."

C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Install smooth transitions, not exceeding 30 degrees, to dampers smaller than adjacent duct. Install transitions as close to damper as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Consult manufacturer for recommended clearance.

B. Clearance:

1. Locate dampers for easy access and provide separate support of dampers that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install dampers with at least 24 inches of clear space on sides of dampers requiring service access.

C. Service Access:

1. Dampers and actuators shall be accessible for visual inspection and service. 2. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of damper to allow service

personnel to hand clean any portion of damper, linkage, and actuator. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

D. Install dampers straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions. Install supplementary structural steel reinforcement for large multiple-section dampers if factory support alone cannot handle loading.

E. Attach actuator(s) to damper drive shaft.

F. For duct-mounted and equipment-mounted dampers installed outside of equipment, install a visible and accessible indication of damper position from outside.

G. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



H. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

I. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with damper identification on damper and on face of ceiling where damper is concealed above ceiling.

3.5 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control-Damper Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration. 2. Check dampers for proper location and accessibility. 3. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction. 4. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 5. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed. 6. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment are secure. 7. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source. 8. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

3.6 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING:

A. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than 30 seconds.

C. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.



SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC 230993.11 - 1

SECTION 230993.11 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control sequences for DDC for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Section 230923 "DDC Systems for HVAC" for control equipment.

1.2 AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Building Automation System Interface:

1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the controller Occupied Bypass, Morning Warm-up/Pre-Cool, Occupied/Unoccupied and Heat/Cool modes.

2. The BAS shall also send the discharge air temperature setpoint and the duct static pressure setpoint.

3. If a BAS is not present, or communication is lost with the BAS the controller shall operate using default modes and setpoints.

B. Occupied:

1. During occupied periods, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. The chilled water and hot water valves shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

3. If economizing is enabled the outside air damper shall also modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

4. If the discharge air temperature sensor fails the chilled water and hot water valves shall close and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

C. Unoccupied:

1. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the hot water valve shall open.

2. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60.0 deg. F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the hot water valve shall close.

3. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the chilled water valve shall open.



4. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85.0 deg. F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the chilled water valve shall close and the outside air damper shall close.

D. Optimal Start:

1. The BAS shall monitor the scheduled occupied time, occupied space setpoints and space temperature to calculate when the optimal start occurs.

E. Morning Warm-Up Mode:

1. During optimal start, if the average space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated.

2. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. 3. The outside air damper shall remain closed. 4. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall

transition to the occupied mode.

F. Pre-Cool Mode:

1. During optimal start, if the average space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated.

2. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless economizing.

3. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

G. Optimal Stop:

1. The BAS shall monitor the scheduled unoccupied time, occupied setpoints and space temperature to calculate when the optimal stop occurs.

2. When the optimal stop mode is active the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the space temperature offset setpoint.

3. Outside air damper shall remain enabled to provide ventilation.

H. Occupied Bypass:

1. The BAS shall monitor the status of the “on” and “cancel” buttons of the space temperature sensors.

2. When an occupied bypass request is received from a space sensor, the unit shall transition from its current occupancy mode to occupied bypass mode and the unit shall maintain the space temperature to the occupied setpoints (adj.).

I. Heat/Cool Mode:

1. When the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint the mode shall transition to cooling.

2. When the space temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall transition to heating.

3. When the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint or below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall remain in its last state.



4. If the space temperature sensor fails the mode shall remain in its last state and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

5. If the local and communicated setpoints fail the controller shall disable the supply fan and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

J. Supply Air Temperature Reset Control:

1. The fan modulates to maintain space temperature while maintaining the discharge air setpoint (normally 55.0 deg. F - 60.0 deg. F).

2. As the cooling load decreases, the fans will modulate down to minimum speed. As the space temperature continues to fall below the cooling setpoint by 1.0 deg. F (adj.) and remains at minimum speed for a period of time (default=10 minutes adj.) the fan will remain at minimum speed and enter into a discharge air reset mode.

3. As the space temperature continues to drop toward the space occupied heating setpoint, the discharge air setpoint is reset between the “normal” discharge air cooling setpoint and the discharge air heating setpoint.

4. When the space temperature decreases to 1.0 deg. F below the heating setpoint, the fan will ramp up to 100% and the heat will be enabled.

5. When the space temperature exceeds the heating setpoint +1.0 deg. F the heat will be disabled and the fan will ramp down to its minimum speed. Reset of the discharge air setpoint will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.) and will follow the schedule to the right.

6. The fan will remain at minimum speed until the space temperature exceeds the cooling setpoint +1.0 deg. F for 10 minutes (adj.). At that point it will revert to its fan modulating mode with its discharge setpoint equal to its Discharge Air Cooling setpoint.

K. Occupied Humidity Control:

1. If the space relative humidity is greater than 50% (adj.), the chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain space relative humidity setpoint of 50% (adj.) and the reheat valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

2. Mode shall terminate when the space relative humidity falls below the relative humidity setpoint of 50% (adj.) minus 3% (adj.).

3. If the space relative humidity sensor fails the dehumidification sequence shall be terminated and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

L. Supply Fan: 1. The supply fan shall be enabled while in the occupied mode and cycled on during the

unoccupied mode. The unit controller shall vary the supply fan speed to optimize minimum fan speed in all cooling and heating modes.

2. A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the fan. If the switch does not open within 40 seconds after a request for fan operation a fan failure alarm shall be annunciated, the unit shall stop, requiring a manual reset.

M. Mixed Air Low Limit:

1. The initial damper opening rate shall be limited to 2% per minute (adj.) until the damper has reached its minimum ventilation position.

2. The outside air damper shall modulate to a position less than the minimum damper position if the mixed air temperature drops below 50.0 deg. F (adj.).

3. If the mixed air temperature sensor fails an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS and the outside air damper shall return to the minimum position.



N. Freeze Protection:

1. A hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the variable speed drive.

2. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped 38.0 deg. F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% (adjust per climate) and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

3. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

O. Filter Status:

1. A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running.

2. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Condensate-drain piping. 4. Air-vent piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement. 2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive. 3. Pressure-seal fittings. 4. Chemical treatment.




A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F. 3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 4. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.



2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Grooved, Mechanical-Joint, Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. 2. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting.

Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

G. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

2. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and EPDM gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.



2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

1. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.

B. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.

2.5 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

a. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less. b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less.

2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less. b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less.



H. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1. One-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one solvent-cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:

1. Brass or copper end, solvent-cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material, rubber gasket, and threaded union.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:



1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

E. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

F. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.




E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.



O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides.

U. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer.



3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from

scratching pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet. 6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.

F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.



E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

H. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

I. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.

3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.



3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.



HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Condensate-drain piping. 4. Air-vent piping.



1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air-control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties.




A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F. 3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 4. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.



5. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which it is attached.

2.2 VALVES

A. Gate, Check, and Ball Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230923.11 "Control Valves" Section 15901 "Control Valves."

C. Plastic Ball Valves:

1. Body: One-, two-, or three-piece CPVC or PVC to match piping. 2. Ball: Full-port CPVC or PVC to match piping. 3. Seats: PTFE. 4. Seals: EPDM. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Handle Style: Tee shape. 7. CWP Rating: Equal to piping service. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: Equal to piping service. 9. Comply with MSS SP-122.

D. Plastic Check Valves:

1. Body: One-, two-, or three-piece PVC or CPVC to match piping. 2. Ends: Socket or flanged. 3. Seats: PTFE. 4. Check Style: Swing or ball type. 5. CWP Rating: Equal to piping service. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: Equal to piping service.

E. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Plug: Resin. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 6. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 7. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.3 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:



1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

2.4 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

C. Expansion Fittings: Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.



STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 1

SECTION 232213 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fittings for LP steam less than 15 psig and condensate piping.


1. Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties" for strainers, flash tanks, special-duty valves, steam traps, thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers, and steam and condensate meters.




A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressures and temperatures unless otherwise indicated:

1. LP Steam Piping: 150 psig. 2. Condensate Piping: 150 psig at 250 deg F. 3. Air-Vent and Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it

is attached.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, plain ends, welded and seamless, Grade B, and Schedule as indicated in piping applications articles.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300 as indicated in piping applications articles.



C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3; Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in piping applications articles.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in piping applications articles.

E. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in piping applications articles; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS


1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. LP Steam Piping: Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Condensate Piping above Grade: Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

3.2 ANCILLARY PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

B. Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Outlet, same as service where installed.

C. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.




C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise indicated.


E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.



H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

K. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

L. Install steam supply piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of steam flow.

M. Install condensate return piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of condensate flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to top of main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.



U. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides.

V. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.

W. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, and control valves.

1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding 300 feet.

X. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

Y. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

Z. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties" for installation requirements for strainers, flash tanks, special-duty valves, steam traps, thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers, and steam and condensate meters.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for installation of hangers and supports. Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers for steel steam supply piping with the following maximum spacing:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 9 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 9 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 12 feet. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 13 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 14 feet.



6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 15 feet.

D. Install hangers for steel steam condensate piping with the following maximum spacing:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet. 6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.


A. Ream ends of pipes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.


A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection.

E. Install a drip leg at coil outlet.




A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength.

3. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES 232216 - 1

SECTION 232216 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following piping specialties for LP steam less than 15 psig and condensate piping:

1. Strainers. 2. Safety valves. 3. Steam traps. 4. Thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers.



1. Pressure-reducing and safety valve. 2. Steam trap. 3. Air vent and vacuum breaker.




A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressures and temperatures unless otherwise indicated:

1. LP Steam Piping: 150 psig. 2. Condensate Piping: 150 psig at 250 deg F. 3. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 4. Air-Vent and Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it

is attached. 5. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it

is attached.



2.2 VALVES

A. Gate, Check, and Ball Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Stop-Check Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Malleable iron. 2. End Connections: Flanged. 3. Disc: Cylindrical with removable liner and machined seat. 4. Stem: Brass alloy. 5. Operator: Outside screw and yoke with cast-iron handwheel. 6. Packing: Polytetrafluoroethylene-impregnated packing with two-piece packing gland

assembly. 7. Pressure Class: 250.

2.3 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for

strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. Tapped blowoff plug. 5. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure.

2.4 SAFETY VALVES

A. Bronze Safety Valves: ASME labeled.

1. Disc Material: Forged copper alloy. 2. End Connections: Threaded inlet and outlet. 3. Spring: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff,

factory set and sealed. 4. Pressure Class: 250. 5. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying

with ASME B1.20.1. 6. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

2.5 STEAM TRAPS

A. Thermostatic Traps:

1. Body: Bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece and screw-in cap. 2. Trap Type: Balanced-pressure.



3. Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 4. Head and Seat: Replaceable, hardened stainless steel. 5. Pressure Class: 125.

B. Float and Thermostatic Traps:

1. Body and Bolted Cap: ASTM A 126, cast iron. 2. End Connections: Threaded. 3. Float Mechanism: Replaceable, stainless steel. 4. Head and Seat: Hardened stainless steel. 5. Trap Type: Balanced pressure. 6. Thermostatic Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 7. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F of superheat and resisting water

hammer without sustaining damage. 8. Vacuum Breaker: Thermostatic with phosphor bronze bellows, and stainless-steel cage,

valve, and seat. 9. Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig.

2.6 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS AND VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Thermostatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel. 2. End Connections: Threaded. 3. Float, Valve, and Seat: Stainless steel. 4. Thermostatic Element: Phosphor bronze bellows in a stainless-steel cage. 5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 6. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

B. Vacuum Breakers:

1. Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel. 2. End Connections: Threaded. 3. Sealing Ball, Retainer, Spring, and Screen: Stainless steel. 4. O-Ring Seal: EPR. 5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 6. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel Bellows, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforced, protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam supply mains, at steam supply connections to equipment, and at the outlet of steam traps.

B. Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.


A. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

C. Install valves according to Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

D. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

3.3 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION

A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment.

B. Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve, and full-port ball valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping"; and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."



B. Pipe safety-valve discharge without valves to atmosphere outside the building.

C. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain.

D. Install exhaust head with drain to waste, on vents equal to or larger than NPS 2-1/2.


A. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

B. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

C. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection.



METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.




A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:



1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.



C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.



7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.



C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal



flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A. 6. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 7. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C. 8. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.




A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 2. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick. 3. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:



1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.7 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated.



B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

D. Exhaust Ducts:


a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:


a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

F. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

G. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:



1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

H. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. 9. Duct accessory hardware.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.



B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Description: Gravity balanced.

B. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm.

C. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.

D. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange.

E. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

F. Blade Action: Parallel.

G. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

H. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

K. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

L. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90-degree stops.



2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 6. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Frames:

1. Hat shaped. 2. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Mitered and welded corners.



B. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches. 2. Parallel-blade design. 3. Galvanized-steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick single skin or 0.0747-inch-thick dual skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

C. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

D. Bearings:

1. Oil-impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of

damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.6 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

B. Material: Galvanized steel.

C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single wall.



2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.

2.9 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

C. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

D. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.



2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

B. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape.

2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.



F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. At drain pans and seals. 2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment. 3. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 4. Upstream from turning vanes. 5. Control devices requiring inspection. 6. Elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

H. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

I. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

K. Connect diffusers to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

L. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape.

M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fixed face grilles


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Fixed Face Grille <Insert drawing designation>:

1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch core. 4. Core Construction: Integral. 5. Frame: 1 inch wide. 6. Mounting: Lay in.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."


DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.



ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS 234300 - 1

SECTION 234300 - ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Electronic air cleaners.







1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4, "Outdoor Air Quality"; Section 5, "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and with ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of testing and rating air-filter units.

B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

C. Comply with ARI 850.

D. Comply with UL 867.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS

A. General Product Information: The Air Cleaner shall have been tested and meet UL Standard 867 and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 187-M19986 for electrostatic Air Cleaners.

1. Non-ionizing, polarized media electronic air cleaners:

a. Certifications: The Air Cleaner shall have been tested and meet UL Standard 867 and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 187-M19986 for electrostatic Air Cleaners.

b. Operation: The Air Cleaner shall have an active electrostatic field that polarizes a dielectric media. It shall not ionize airborne particles or produce ozone.

c. Laboratory Testing Performance: Using the ASHRAE 52.2 protocol with carbon black in the test dust, the Air Cleaner shall test at MERV 13. Using the ASHRAE 52.2-NC protocol (with no carbon in the loading dust), the Air Cleaner shall test at MERV 15. As installed, it shall have a clean static pressure drop of less than 0.32” w.g. at 500 feet per minute and shall increase in resistance no more than 0.25” w.g. with a dust loading of 2,855 grams. It shall hold a total of 4,582 grams of dust at its final resistance of 1.4” w.g. per 24x24 module. Any substitute Air Cleaner must meet these MERV ratings, static pressures and loading characteristics. The Air Cleaner manufacturer must provide testing from an approved ASHRAE test lab to verify MERV rating, operational and loading performance.

d. Field Performance: The Air Cleaner manufacturer shall produce at least two documented installation references, including client contact information with the following criteria:

1) Air Cleaners shall have operated continuously for a minimum of 2.5 years with no pre-filtration and without media change and achieved an increase of less than .2 inches of static pressure at a face velocity of ~500fpm, in an urban environment. Air cleaner installations must be greater than 10,000 cfm and serving office and/or hospital space.

2) In an urban environment, Air Cleaners must have demonstrated the ability to achieve indoor ultra-fine particle and black carbon levels that are up to 94% lower than the concentrations in the air outside the building. Outdoor air levels brought into in the building must be based on the ASHRAE Standard 62 Ventilation Rate Procedure.

3) Air Cleaners shall have a documented ability to reduce TVOC levels by 50-60% in a single pass. Air Cleaners must have already been in service for over 90 days. Tests must be administered by an independent, third-party and readings must be taken immediately upstream and downstream of the Air Cleaning system over at least a 24-hour period.



e. Construction: The Air Cleaner modules shall consist of four or six individual Air Cleaners. Each Air Cleaner shall be 6” high and 24 or 29.5” deep and the width shall be 26, 30, 34, 38, 39, 43, or 48”. The construction of the Air Cleaner frame shall be aluminum, and the screens, side panels and attachment flanges shall be of galvanized steel. The Air Cleaner modules and each component thereof must have a positive seal where necessary to prevent bypass of air.

f. Electronics: The high voltage powerheads shall require 24 volts AC input and have a 9.5kV DC output. The powerheads must be fully potted and connected in parallel.

g. Control Panel: The 24VAC power supply must be a UL or CSA certified transformer, class “2” type, which shall permit one side of the secondary output (24V) to be attached to electrical ground. A Filter Minihelic gauge shall be installed in the Unit Control Panel (optional direct readout or signal tied into building automation).

h. Filter Media: Each Air Cleaner shall have a disposable and recyclable media pad with a minimum of a class “2” fire rating. It shall have a positive seal in the overall filter assembly.

i. Configuration: The Air Cleaners will be arranged in pre-fabricated module assemblies nominally 12” or 18” in height, of varying widths up to 48” and either 24 or 29.5” depth in direction of airflow. The number of modules and width shall be such that the face velocity thru the filter bank shall be no more than 550 fpm. The frames and electronics of the V8 modules will be permanently mounted in the air handler. The filter rack will be constructed so as to allow front access for media changes of the V8 assembly.

j. The fan system has been designed for specific values delivered by total filtration. The system is designed for a maximum of 0.55" w.g when the filters are dirty. The intent is that the construction filters are removed after 30 days from initial startup and the system energy use is minimized. In case a substitute system is proposed, the AHU manufacturer is responsible to purchase and store sufficient replacement filters so as not to exceed a total static pressure of 0.55” w.g for a period of 4 years from final acceptance. Material responsibility not to exceed total media changes of 6 times per year.

k. Air handler manufacturer shall provide a fully operational filter section for field connection and field electrical tie-in. All associated electrical and control wiring integral to the air cleaner to be provided by the air cleaner manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance.

B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.



C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

D. Operate electronic air cleaners for 24 hours as part of startup before filters are put into operation.

E. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations.


A. Tests and Inspections: Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.

B. Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new prefilter media.



MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 - 1

SECTION 237313 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Variable-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Unit dimensions and weight. 2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 3. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan-sound power ratings. c. Fan construction and accessories. d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Filters with performance characteristics.





B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.

C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."



E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. 2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets. 3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. 4. Factory Finish for Steel and Galvanized-Steel Casings: Apply manufacturer's standard

primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Casing Insulation:

1. Panel insulation shall provide a minimum thermal resistance (R) value of 13 ft²•h•ºF/Btu throughout the entire unit. Insulation shall completely fill the panel cavities in all directions so that no voids exist and settling of insulation is prevented. Panel insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Access / Inspection / Turning Section:

1. A section shall be provided to allow additional access/inspection of unit components and space for field-installed components as needed. An access door shall be provided for easy access. All access sections shall be complete with a double-wall, removable door downstream for inspection, cleaning, and maintenance. Interior and exterior door panels shall be of the same construction as the interior and exterior wall panels, respectively. All doors downstream of cooling coils shall be provided with a thermal break construction of door panel and door frame.

D. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Access doors shall be 2-inch double-wall construction. Interior and exterior door panels shall be of the same construction as the interior and exterior wall panels, respectively. All doors downstream of cooling coils shall be provided with a thermal break construction of door panel and door frame. Gasketing shall be provided around the full perimeter of the doors to prevent air leakage.

2. Surface-mounted handles shall be provided to allow quick access to the interior of the functional section and to prevent through-cabinet penetrations that could likely weaken the casing leakage and thermal performance. Handle hardware shall be designed to prevent unintended closure. Access doors shall be hinged and removable for quick, easy access. Hinges shall be interchangeable with the door handle hardware to allow for



alternating door swing in the field to minimize access interference due to unforeseen job site obstructions. Door handle hardware shall be adjustable and visually indicate locking position of door latch external to the section.

3. All doors shall be a minimum of 60 inches high when sufficient height is available, or the maximum height allowed by the unit height.

4. Door handles will be provided for each latching point of the door necessary to maintain the specified air leakage integrity of the unit. Optionally, a single-handle door shall be provided for all outward swinging doors linked to multiple latching points necessary to maintain the specified air leakage integrity of the unit.

E. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. In sections provided with a drain pan, the drain pan shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1. To address indoor air quality (lAO) the drain pan shall be sloped in two planes promoting positive drainage to eliminate stagnant water conditions. Drain pan shall be insulated, and of double wall construction. The outlet shall be the lowest point on the pan, and shall be of sufficient diameter to preclude drain pan overflow under normally expected operating conditions. All drain pans connections shall have a threaded connection, extending a minimum of 2-1/2" beyond the unit base, and shall be made from the same material as the drain pan. Drain pan located under a cooling coil shall be of sufficient size to collect all condensate produced from the coil.

F. Lifting Instructions:

1. The air handling units must be rigged, lifted, and installed in strict accordance with the Installation, Operation, and Maintenance manual (CLCH-SVX07B-EN). The units are also to be installed in strict accordance with the specifications. Units may be shipped fully assembled or disassembled to the minimum functional section size in accordance with shipping and job site requirements.

2. Indoor units shall be shipped on an integral base frame (variable from the standard 2.5" to 8" height) for the purpose of mounting units to a housekeeping pad and providing additional height to properly trap condensate from the unit. The integral base frame may be used for ceiling suspension, external isolation, or as a housekeeping pad. Refer to the unit As-Built or Product Data section of the submittal for the base frame height of each unit.

3. All units will be shipped with an integral base frame designed with the necessary number of lift points for safe installation. All lifting lugs are to be utilized during lift. The lift points will be designed to accept standard rigging devices and be removable after installation. Units shipped in sections will have a minimum of four points of lift.

2.2 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. The fan type shall be provided as required for stable operation and optimum energy efficiency. The fan shall be a double-width, double-inlet, multiblade-type, forward-curved (FC) fan. The fan shall be equipped with self-aligning, antifriction bearings with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours as calculated per ANSVAFBIIM Standard 9. For any bearing requiring relubrication, the grease



line shall be extended to the fan support bracket on the drive side. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory as a complete fan assembly (fan wheel, motor, drive, and belts). The fan shaft shall not exceed 75 percent of its first critical speed at any cataloged speed. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the fan shaft to prevent slipping. The fan shafts shall be solid steel. The fan section shall be provided with an access door on the drive side of the fan.

1. Fan performance shall be certified as complying with AI---HI Standard 430.

B. The drives shall be constant speed with fixed-pitch sheaves. The drives shall be selected at a minimum 50 percent larger than the motor brake horsepower (1.5 service factor).

C. The motor shall be mounted integral to the isolated fan assembly and furnished by the unit manufacturer. The motor is mounted inside the unit casing on an adjustable base to permit adjustment of drive belt tension (not applicable for direct drive plenum fans). The motor shall meet or exceed all NEMA Standards Publication MG 1 requirements and comply with NEMA Premium efficiency levels when applicable except for fractional horsepower motors which are not covered by the NEMA classification. The motor shall be T-frame, squirrel cage with size, type, and electrical characteristics as shown on the equipment schedule.

1. Refer to the drawings for selected fan motors within each unit.

D. The fan and motor assembly (on sizes 10 to 120) shall be internally isolated from the unit casing with 2-inch (50.8 mm) deflection spring isolators, furnished and installed by the unit manufacturer. The isolation system shall be designed to resist loads produced by external forces, such as earthquakes, and conform to the current IBC seismic requirements.

2.3 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. The coil section shall be provided complete with coil and coil holding frame. The coils shall be installed such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casings. If two or more cooling coils are stacked in the unit, an intermediate drain pan shall be installed between each coil and be of the same material as the primary drain pan. Like the primary drain pan, the intermediate drain pan shall be designed being of sufficient size to collect all condensation produced from the coil and sloped to promote positive drainage to eliminate stagnant water conditions. The intermediate pan shall begin at the leading face of the water -producing device and be of sufficient length extending downstream to prevent condensate from passing through the air stream of the lower coil. Intermediate drain pan shall include downspouts to direct condensate to the primary drain pan. The outlet shall be located at the lowest point of the pan and shall be sufficient diameter to preclude drain pan overflow under any normally expected operating condition.

2. Casing penetrations supplied for hydronic drain and vents. Piping contractor shall provide extended piping.

3. No casing penetrations supplied for hydronic drain and vents. If required, piping contractor will need to drill drain and vent penetrations using factory located features provided in coil panel.



B. Water Coils, Controls, and Accessories: Comply with UL 1995.

1. The coils shall have aluminum fins and seamless copper tubes. Copper fins may be applied to coils with 518-inch tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled, and firmly bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion of the tubes. The coil casing may be galvanized or stainless steel. Refer to the Product Data section of the submittal for the coil casing material.

2. The coils shall be proof-tested to 300 psig and leak-tested underwater to 200 psig. Coils containing water or ethylene glycol are certified in accordance with the AHRI Forced-Circulation Air -Cooling and Air -Healing Coils Certification Program which is based on AHRI Standard 410 within the Range of Standard Rating Conditions listed in Table 1 of the Standard. Certified units may be found in the AHRI Directory at www.ahridirectory.org. Propylene glycol and calcium chloride, or mixtures thereof, are outside the scope of AHRI Standard 410 and, therefore, do not require AHRI410 rating or certification.

3. Coil connections are constructed of cast iron with female connections, steel block with female connections or steel pipe with male connections.

4. Tubes are 1/2" OD 0.016" thick copper.

2.4 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. A section shall be provided to support the filter rack as indicated throughout the unit. Refer to Product Data and As-Built sections of the submittal for specific locations within each unit.

B. Disposable Panel Filters:

1. 2-inch pleated media filters made with 100% synthetic fibers that are continuously laminated to a supported steel-wire grid with water repellent adhesive shall be provided. Filters shall be capable of operating up to 625 fpm face velocity without loss of filter efficiency and holding capacity. The filters shall have a MERV 8 rating when tested in accordance with the ANSVASHRAE Standard 52.2.

C. Main filters:

1. Refer to Section 234300 “Electronic Air Cleaners”.

2.5 DAMPERS

A. Dampers shall modulate the volume of outdoor, return, or exhaust air. The dampers shall be of double-skin airfoil design with metal, compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade-edge seals on all blades. The blades shall rotate on stainless-steel sleeve bearings. The dampers shall be rated for a maximum leakage rate of 3 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. wg complying with ASHRAE 90.1



maximum damper leakage. All leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA Standard 500-D. Dampers may be arranged in a parallel or opposed-blade configuration.

2.6 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. See drawings for all capacities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-handling units on new raised platform. 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.

D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

E. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

F. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

G. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

H. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

I. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

J. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."



HUMIDIFIERS 238413 - 1

SECTION 238413 - HUMIDIFIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes steam-injection humidifiers.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with ARI 640, "Commercial and Industrial Humidifiers."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Product shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and fabrication for a period of two years after installation or 27 months from ship date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEAM-INJECTION HUMIDIFIERS

A. Steam injection device, which directly injects pressurized boiler steam into ducted or free air for humidification, available in the following configurations:

1. Single−tube, factory−assembled multiple tubes, or site−assembled multiple tubes: a. Dispersion tube(s) shall be constructed of stainless steel with Heli−arc welded

seams. Design of the dispersion tube(s) shall provide steam jacketing for the full length of an internal tube, which is fitted with high temperature resin tubelets.

b. Each internal tube shall have two rows of high temperature resin tubelets, arranged to discharge the steam in a V−pattern. Each tubelet shall extend through and into



the approximate center of the dispersion tube and incorporate a properly sized calibrated orifice.

c. Dispersion tube(s) shall extend the width of the duct. A two−piece escutcheon plate for sealing the duct opening around the dispersion tube shall be provided. Note: Field−installed tubes shall discharge steam against airflow.

d. Tube assembly options:

B. Separator:

1. The humidifier shall have a 304 stainless steel water/steam separator with Heli−arc welded seams. The separator shall be a centrifugal type design with internal drying tube for condensate removal.

C. Steam valve and actuator:

1. Valve shall be a normally closed modulating type with modified linear flow. Valve trim shall be stainless steel and valve maximum flow rate shall not exceed specified humidifier capacity by more than 20%. Actuator shall be a pneumatic type to modulate the steam valve in response to a variable pneumatic signal demand and be direct acting.

D. Steam trap(s):

1. Humidifier shall have one or two float/thermostatic trap(s) for applications equal to or below 15 psi steam, or one or two inverted bucket steam trap(s) for applications above 15 psi steam. See drawings for trap locations.

2.2 HUMIDIFIER OPTIONS

A. Humidifier shall meet OSHPD Special Seismic Pre−approval for a Sds = 2.5g (Mini−bank only).

B. Valve options:

1. On−off electric valve: Two−position, normally closed solenoid operated, on−off steam valve. Valve shall respond to a signal from a compatible humidistat. Control voltage 24, 120, 240 VAC.

2. Modulating electronic control valve: Normally closed modulating type with an electronic actuator. Actuator shall respond to a variable electronic signal. Available signal inputs: 4 mA to 20 mA, 0 VDC to 10 VDC.

3. Pilot positioner: The valve pneumatic operator shall be equipped with an adjustable pilot positioner.

C. Temperature switch options:

1. Temperature switch, pneumatic: Pneumatic temperature switch shall be field installed to work in conjunction with pneumatic operated steam valve to prevent cold start−up of humidifier. Pneumatic air signal shall vent below 215 °F (102 °C).



2. Temperature switch, electric: Electric temperature switch shall be field installed to work in conjunction with an electric or electronic operated steam valve to prevent cold start−up of humidifier. Field set at 220 °F (104 °C).

D. Insulated dispersion tube(s):

1. Dispersion tube(s) shall be insulated with 1/2" (12.7 mm) fiberglass enclosed with a stainless steel wrapper. Important: Insulated field−installed tubes shall discharge steam with airflow.

E. Horizontal separator:

1. The humidifier shall have a horizontally−oriented, centrifugal type water/steam separator with an internal discharge tube, which extends into the center of the separator for steam/condensation separation. Separator shall be constructed of stainless steel with Heli−arc welded seams.

2.3 HUMIDIFIER CONTROL OPTIONS

A. Control input accessory options:

1. Humidistat, electronic, room: Electronic humidistat shall be room−mounted and produce a modulated DC signal output, field−selectable 0 to 10 VDC or 6 to 9 VDC with control action field−selectable to be direct or reverse acting. Set point range 20% to 80% RH, supply voltage 24 DC or 24 AC. Maximum ambient temperature 122 °F (50 °C).

2. Airflow proving switch, pressure type: Airflow proving switch shall be diaphragm−operated with pitot tube for field installation. Switch shall have an adjustable control point range of 0.05" to 12" wc (12.5 Pa to 2988 Pa). Operating temperature range −40 °F to 180 °F (−40 °C to 82 °C). Compatible with 24, 120 and 240 VAC.

2.4 HUMIDIFIER ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install humidifiers with required clearance for service and maintenance. Maintain path, downstream from humidifiers, clear of obstructions as required by ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Seal humidifier manifold duct or plenum penetrations with flange.

C. Install humidifier manifolds in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."

D. Install drip leg upstream from steam trap a minimum of 12 inches tall for proper operation of trap.



E. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1. Install piping adjacent to humidifiers to allow service and maintenance.

F. Install electrical devices and piping specialties furnished by manufacturer but not factory mounted.

G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

H. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

I. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain humidifiers. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2.

C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


B. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Branch Circuits: Copper. No. 12 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.



3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install stranded conductors for No. 12 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Flexible raceway runs.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: copper, not less than No. 12 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical



service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.


A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.


A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.



1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.



B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.



G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

E. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

F. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.



G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs not allowed.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35-mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

M. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

O. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

Q. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

R. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

S. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.



T. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.



C. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.



E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Equipment identification labels.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.



B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.



C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than [30] <Insert number> A, and [120] <Insert number> V to ground: Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.



1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

F. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.



WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:



1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Single Pole:

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.



9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Control circuits. b. Panelboards. c. Switchboards. d. Enclosed controllers. e. Enclosed switches.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

1. Type RK-1: 250-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type RK-5: 250-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.


FUSES 262813 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Enclosures.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.



B. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install fuses in fusible devices.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

C. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS




B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 4100 K.

E. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours or greater.

F. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

G. Internal driver.

H. Nominal Operating Voltage: Universal.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STRIP LIGHT

A. Minimum 4400 lumens.

B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and

other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2.4 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.

F. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.




EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 1

SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support, arranged by designation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

C. Sample Warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING


B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp continuously at an output of 1400 lumens each upon loss of normal power or as shown. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

3. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium or lead-acid type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.

B. Emergency Luminaires:

1. Emergency Luminaires: Lighting Fixture Schedule: a. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed fixtures in wet

locations.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Internally Lighted Signs:



1. 2. Operating at nominal voltage of universal voltage. 3. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 4. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:

1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions. 2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other

changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

D. Conduit: Electrical metallic tubing, minimum 3/4 inch in diameter.

2.5 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.



D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of

ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of fixture weight.

E. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.




DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. System smoke detectors. 3. Heat detectors. 4. Notification appliances. 5. Addressable interface device.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. General Submittal Requirements:



1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level IV minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment.

d. Riser diagram. e. Record copy of site-specific software. f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.




A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an FM Global-approved alarm company.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Existing FACP is an XLS1000 Honeywell unit.

B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations. 2. Smoke detectors. 3. Duct smoke detectors.



B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. 3. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control

module, or remote annunciator. 4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Failure of battery charging.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Existing system is a Honeywell XLS1000 main controller

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be

a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or



5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:



a. Primary status. b. Device type.



c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.



a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 4. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control

circuit.

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch high letters on the lens.

1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 4. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.

2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.



2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.8 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor.

D. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: Comply with NFPA 72.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches (9100 mm) long shall be supported at both ends.

G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.



H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

I. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.2 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 2. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 3. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker. 4. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:



1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

F. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.



TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 of 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 311000 - SITE CLEARING 312000 – EARTH MOVING 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES


SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.

E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures.



5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.



3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

C. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 33 Sections.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.

2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth indicated on Drawings in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.



3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.



EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses and plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks, pavements. 5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.



H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

B. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.



E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil



materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material, 4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:



1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.



B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.

3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.



3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.



3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - 1

SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.


A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads.

1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks.

D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for application.

E. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.

F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Soldier Piles: Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.

1. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.

2. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.

B. Sheet Piling: Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches (1500 mm). Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.

C. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless otherwise approved by Architect.

2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until

permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.



3.2 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS

A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.

1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches (1200 mm) below overlaying construction and abandon remainder.

B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.



TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1

SECTION 329200 – TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes seeding.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand

with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to

become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface

of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product certificates. C. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates.


A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.

B. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

1.5 LAWN MAINTENANCE

A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Lawns: 60 Calendar days from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: March 15 – May 15. 2. Fall Planting: Labor day – October 15.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species, as follows:



B. Lawn Areas: 30% Perennial Ryegrass, 30% Kentucky Bluegrass, 40% Creeping Red Fescue.

2.2 PLANTING MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site and supplement with imported or

manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil.

2. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources.

B. Inorganic Soil Amendments: 1. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T or O, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80

percent calcium carbonate equivalent. 2. Sulfur: Granular, biodeg radable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a

minimum 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.

3. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

4. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. C. Organic Soil Amendments

1. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8. 2. Peat: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture,

with pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. 3. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially

decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

4. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

D. Fertilizer: 1. Chemical Fertilizer: 12:12:12.

E. Mulches: 1. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of

wheat, rye, oats, or barley. 2. Peat Mulch: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular

texture, with pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. 3. Peat Mulch: Finely divided or granular texture, with pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing

partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

4. Wood Chips for Landscape-Drainage Beds: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LAWN PREPARATION

A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Apply chemical fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix.

C. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

D. Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments

and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

F. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

G. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. H. Provide wood chips at all roof drainage locations where water is discharged to the ground.

3.2 SEEDING

A. Sow seed at the rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft. (1.4 to 1.8 kg/92.9 sq. m). B. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. C. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly

at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

3.3 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseeding application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply mulch at a

minimum rate of 1500-lb/acre dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate.



3.4 SATISFACTORY LAWNS

A. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm).

B. Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 1

SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping joining materials. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Identification devices. 5. Grout. 6. Piping system common requirements. 7. Equipment installation common requirements. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Metal supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.

B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.



1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Identification devices.




A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS


1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated.


2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.


C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.



2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries, International, Inc. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:



a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

3. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) and larger.

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric Couplings:





a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation.

3. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller.

a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). b. End Connections: Threaded.

E. Dielectric Nipples:



a. Perfection Corporation. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Victaulic Company.

3. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.

a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.

2.3 SLEEVES

A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.



2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.

2. Location: Accessible and visible.

B. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type. Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive-vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

D. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

F. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

G. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick.

1. Width: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches (150 mm); 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) for larger pipes.

2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, aluminum. 2. Material: 0.0375-inch- (1-mm-) thick stainless steel. 3. Material: 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white

inner layer. 4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic. 5. Size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.

I. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.

J. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine



subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification.

2. Thickness: : 1/8 inch (3 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200

mm) in length, and 1/8 inch (3 mm) for larger units. 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.

K. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:

a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,

and speed.

7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dielectric flanges.

B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:



1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dielectric nipples.


A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.


D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.



H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-

board partitions.

L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.



3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.

I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138

Appendix.



L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

N. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping.

2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:

a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units.

Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible

enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.



B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment.

1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.

2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.



C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



APPENDIX I

GLOSSARY


GLOSSARY ActivityAn element in the Progress Schedule establishing a requisite step, or the time and resources required, for completing the part of the Work associated with that Activity. AddendaWritten instruments that are used by the Owner and/or Professional to incorporate interpretations or clarifications, modifications and other information into the Bidding Documents. An Addendum issued after Bid opening to those Bidders who actually submitted a Bid, for the purpose of re-bidding the Work without re-advertising, is referred to as a post-Bid Addendum. Agency- Any unit, section, division, department or other instrumentality of the State that benefits from the Work. AlternateRefers to work specified in the Bidding Documents for which the Bidder must bid a Bid Price. Apparent Low Bidders: Those Bidders whose Base Bid, when added to those specific Alternates the Owner intends to accept, yields the three lowest sums of Bid and Alternates. Additional Bidders may be considered Apparent Low Bidders if their Bid, when added to those specific Alternates the Owner intends to accept, yields a sum within 10% of the lowest of the Apparent Low Bidder’s sum. If a qualified disabled veteran meets the requirements of the contract solicitation and with the veteran’s preference is the lowest Bidder it is considered the Apparent Low Bidder.

Archaeological FeatureAny prehistoric or historic deposit of archaeological value, as determined by a representative of a State agency that is duly authorized to evaluate such findings and render such judgments. An Archaeological Feature deposit may include, but is not limited to Indian habitations, ceremonial sites, abandoned settlements, treasure trove, artifacts or other objects with intrinsic archaeological value and that relate to the history and culture of the State of Michigan. The Archaeological Features are listed under Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions. Authorized Technical DataInformation and data contained in a report of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions. Also, any physical data (dimension, location, conditions, etc.) contained in those Drawings of physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities. Best Value-The bids will be evaluated for best value based on price and qualitative components that may include but are not limited to technical design, technical approach, quality of proposed personnel, and management plans, per PA 430 of 2012. BidWritten offer by a Bidder for the Work, as specified, which designates the Bidder’s Base Bid and Bid Prices for all Alternates. The term Bid includes a re-bid. BidderThe Person acting directly, or through an authorized representative, who submits a Bid directly to the Owner. Bidding DocumentsThe proposed Contract Documents as advertised, and all Addenda issued before execution of the Contract. Bid Price The Bidder’s price for a lump sum item of work, or the product of the Bidder’s unit price for an item of Unit Price Work times the quantity given on the Bid Form for that item. Bid SecuritySecurity serving as a guarantee that the Bidder will conform to all conditions. Bidding RequirementsThe Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions, Information for Bidders, Bid Form, Bid Form Attachments and qualification submittals, as advertised and as modified by Addenda, and any other Section included within Division 0 of the Bidding Documents for the purpose of governing bidding and award of the Contract. BoardThe Administrative Board of the State of Michigan. Bond Security furnished by the Contractor, as required by the Contract Documents. Business DayAny Day except Saturdays, Sundays and holidays observed by the Owner. BulletinA request used by the Owner to describe a change in the Work under consideration by the Owner and to request the Contractor to submit a proposal for the corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, if any. Calendar DayEvery day shown on the calendar, Saturdays, Sundays and holidays included. Cash AllowanceAn Owner-specified sum included within the Contract Price to reimburse the Contractor for the actual purchase/furnished cost of materials and/or equipment or other designated items, as specifically provided in the Contract


Documents. Although the scope (e.g., the required quantity) of any Work covered by a Cash Allowance is sufficiently detailed in the Contract Documents for the purposes of bidding the required labor costs, Subcontract costs, construction equipment costs and general conditions costs and Fee, it is understood that the required materials, equipment or other designated items are of uncertain purchase cost at the time of Bid or are yet to be specified in more detail by the Professional as to quality, appearance, durability, finish and such other necessary features affecting purchase price. Change OrderA written order issued and signed by the Owner, which amends the Contract Documents for changes in the Work or an adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, or both. Contract AwardThe official action of the Board or the Director-FBSA awarding the Contract to the Contractor. Contract DocumentsWritten and graphic documents that form the legal agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, consisting of this document, completed Bid and Contract forms, terms and conditions of the contract, specifications, drawings, addenda, Notice of Award, Notice-to-Proceed and contract change orders. Contract PriceThe total compensation, including authorized adjustments, payable by the Owner to the Contractor (subject to provisions for Unit Price Work). Contract TimesThe Contract Times for the entire Work are the periods allowed, including authorized adjustments, for Substantial Completion and final completion of the Work. The Contract Times for a designated portion of the Work are the periods allowed for Substantial Completion and final completion of any such portion of the Work, as specified in the Contract Documents. ContractorBusiness enterprise with which the Owner has entered into the Contract. Correction PeriodPeriod during which the Contractor must, in accordance with the Contract Documents, (a) correct or, if rejected, remove and replace Defective Work, and (b) maintain warranties for materials and equipment in full force and effect. Cost of the Work InvolvedThe sum of all costs that would be, or actually were, necessarily incurred by the Contractor in providing any Work Involved with the related change, less the costs that would be, or would have been, incurred by the Contractor to provide such Work without the related change. DefectiveAs determined by the Professional, an adjective which when referring to or when applied to the term “Work” refers to (a) Work not conforming to the Contract Documents or not meeting the requirements of an inspection, test or approval, or (b) Work itemized in a Punch List which the Contractor fails to complete or correct within a reasonable time after issuance of the Punch List by the Professional. DelayAny act or omission or other event that in any manner adversely affects or alters the schedule, progress or completion of all or any part of the Work. Delay is a generic term intended to include deferral, stoppage, slow down, interruption and extended performance, and all related hindrance, rescheduling, disruption, interference, inefficiency and productivity and production losses. Department (DTMB)Department of Technology, Management and Budget of the State of Michigan. Director is the Director of the Department. Director-FBSA is the Director of DTMB Facilities and Business Services Administration. DivisionEach of the numbered, distinct parts (starting with Division 0) into which the Specifications are divided. DrawingsPart of the Contract Documents showing the Work. Drawings must neither serve nor be used as Shop Drawings. EmergencyA condition affecting the safety or protection of persons, or the Work, or property at or adjacent to the site. Facilities and Business Services Administration (FBSA)-Entity in the Department responsible for design, construction, and operations and maintenance of facilities. Fee for the Work Involved (Fee)An established, percentage mark-up on the Cost of the Work Involved which is allowed to the Contractor for (a) reasonable administrative costs, and (b) negotiated, reasonable profit on the Cost of the Work Involved. Hazardous MaterialAsbestos containing materials (ACMs), Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), petroleum products, such construction materials as paint thinners, solvents, gasoline, oil, etc., and any other like material the manufacture, use, treatment, storage, transportation or disposal of which is regulated by federal, State or local Laws governing the protection of public health, natural resources or the environment.


Invitation To Bid (ITB) -The solicitation document presenting the terms and conditions that will become part of the Contract when the Bid is accepted. Law(s)Means federal, State and local statutes, ordinances, orders, rules and/or regulations. MCLThe Michigan Compiled Laws of the State of Michigan. Means and MethodsIncludes means, methods, techniques, sequences and/or procedures applicable to the Work. Notice of AwardWritten notice accepting the Bid to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder and designating the Contract Price (and establishing the Alternates accepted by the Owner). Notice-to-ProceedWritten notice issued by the Project Director directing the Contractor to commence the construction activities and establishing the start date of the Contract Time. On-Site Inspection–The Professional’s on-site examination of the Contractor’s completed or in progress Work to determine and verify to the Project Director that the quantity and quality of all Work complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. OwnerThe State of Michigan, with whom the Contractor has entered into the Contract and for whom the Work is to be provided. Owner Field RepresentativeA State employee or consultant, acting under the direction of the Project Director, providing on-site, periodic observation and documentation of the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents. Partial UseUse by the Owner of a designated portion of the Work before accomplishing Substantial Completion of the entire Work. Partial Use does not mean Substantial Completion of the portion of the Work placed in use by the Owner. PersonIndividuals, partnerships, corporations, receivers, trustees, joint ventures or any other legal entity and any combinations of any of them. Political SubdivisionAny county, city, village or other local unit of the State, including any agency, department or instrumentality of any such county, city, village or other local unit. PostBid Submittal A Qualification Submittal required of the Bidder selected under Section 00100 - 22 before Contract Award, and which is used by the Owner in the evaluation of the Bid of the selected Bidder. Professional Services Contractor (PSC or Professional)The individual or business entity who has the authority to practice the design disciplines required by the Contract Documents. An Agency with appropriate licensing may replace the PSC in their role if a consultant is not used. ProjectThe total construction, which includes the Work and possibly other work completed by others, as indicated in the Contract Documents. Project Director-Designated State employee(s) (a) Responsible for directing and supervising the Professional’s services during the period allowed for completion of the Work; and/or (b) Acting as representative for the Owner and for the enforcement of the Contract Documents, approving payment to the Contractor and coordinating the activities of the State, Owner, Professional and Contractor. Project ScheduleWork Schedule that shows the Contractor's approach to planning, scheduling and execution of the Work and that accurately portrays completed Work as to sequencing and timing, as provided in the Contract Documents. Project SpecificationsThe Contract Documents organized into Divisions. "Technical Specifications" means Divisions of the Specifications consisting of technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship. Provisionary AllowanceAn amount included within the Contract Price to reimburse the Contractor for the cost to furnish and perform Work that is uncertain because, for example, it is indeterminate in scope and may not be shown or detailed in the Contract Documents. Punch ListA list of minor items to be completed or corrected by the Contractor, any one of which do not materially impair the use of the Work for its intended purpose. Qualified Disabled Veteran (QDV)-QDV as defined by Public Act 22 of 2010, MCL 18.1241.3 and supported by a DD214 Proof of Service and Discharge, a Veterans Administration rating decision letter, proof of disability (if the disability is not indicated on the DD214), and appropriate legal documents setting forth the 51% natural persons QDV ownership.


Record DocumentsDrawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Change Authorizations, Bulletins, inspection, test and approval reports, photographs, written clarifications and interpretations and all other documents recording, or annotated to show, all revisions and deviations between the as-built installation and the Contract Documents, all approved Submittals and all clarifications and interpretations. RecordsBooks, reports, documents, electronic data, and other evidence relating to the bidding, award and furnishing and performance of the Work. Recycled MaterialRecycled paper products, structural materials made from recycled plastics, re-refined lubricating oils, reclaimed solvents, recycled asphalt and concrete, recycled glass products, re-treaded tires, ferrous metals containing recycled scrap metals and all other materials that contain (a) waste materials generated by a business or consumer, (b) materials that have served their intended purpose, and/or (c) materials that have been separated from solid waste for collection, recycling and disposition in the percentage determined by the State as provided by Law. Request for PaymentThe form provided by the Owner (Payment Request DTMB-0440) to be used by the Contractor in requesting payment for Work completed, which must enclose all supporting information required by the Contract Documents. Schedule of ValuesA schedule of pay items, which subdivides the Work into its various parts and which details, for each itemized part, cost and pricing information required for making payments for Work performed. The sum of all pay item costs in the Schedule of Values must equal the Contract Price for the Work. Shop DrawingsIncludes drawings, diagrams, illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions and other data prepared by or for the Contractor to illustrate some part of the Work, or by a Supplier and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate items of material or equipment. Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control–The planning, design and installation of appropriate Best Management Practices designed and engineered specifically to reduce or eliminate the off-site migration of soils via water runoff, wind, vehicle tracking, etc. Soil erosion and sedimentation control in the State of Michigan is regulated under The Natural Resources Environmental Protection Act; Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control, 1994 PA 451, Part 91, as amended, MCL 324.9101 et seq. Soil erosion and sedimentation control associated with this Contract is monitored and enforced by the DTMB-FBSA. StateThe State of Michigan in its governmental capacity, including its departments, divisions, agencies, boards, offices, commissions, officers, employees and agents. Non-capitalized references to a state refer to a state other than the State of Michigan. State Construction CodeThe Michigan State Construction Code Act, 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL 125.1501 et seq. SubcontractorA Person having an agreement with the Contractor to provide labor at the site and furnishing materials and/or equipment for incorporation into the Work. SubmittalsIncludes technical Submittals, Progress Schedules and those other documents required for submission by the Contract Documents. The term "technical Submittal" includes Shop Drawings, brochures, samples, Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, test procedures and any other Submittal the Contract Documents require the Contractor to submit to demonstrate how the items covered, after installation or incorporation into the Work, will conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design of the completed Work as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents. Substantial CompletionThe Work, or a portion of the Work designated in the Contract Documents as eligible for separate Substantial Completion, has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents as determined by the PSC, to the extent that the Owner can use or occupy the entire Work, or the designated portion of the Work, for the use intended without any outstanding, concurrent Work at the site, except as may be required to complete or correct Punch List items. SupplierA manufacturer or fabricator, or a distributor, material man or vendor representing a manufacturer or fabricator, who has an agreement with the Contractor to furnish materials and/or equipment. Underground UtilitiesPipelines, piping, conduit, duct, cables, wells, tanks, tunnels and appurtenances, or other similar facilities, installed underground to convey or support conveyance of potable water, sprinkler or irrigation water, fire protection systems, electricity, gases, steam, petroleum products, sewerage and drainage removal, telephone, communications, cable TV, traffic or control systems. Unit Price WorkWork involving specified quantities (i.e., related Work quantities) which when performed is measured by the Professional and paid using the measured quantities and unit prices contained in the Contract Documents. Performance of Unit


Price Work for undefined quantities is contingent upon conditions encountered at the site, as determined and authorized by the Professional. Unit Price Work, SpecifiedWork of specified and defined quantities (i.e., quantities are detailed in, and can be taken-off from, the Contract Documents) that when performed is measured by the Professional and paid based on the measured quantities and unit prices contained in the Contract Documents. Work (as in “the Work,” "the entire Work”)The entire completed Construction required by the Contract Documents. The Work results from furnishing and performing all services, obligations, responsibilities, management, supervision, labor, materials, equipment, construction equipment, general conditions, permits, taxes, patent fees and royalties, testing, inspection and approval responsibilities, warranties, temporary facilities, small tools, field supplies, Bonds, insurance, mobilization, close-out, overhead and all connections, devices and incidental items of any kind or nature required and/or made necessary by the Contract Documents. Work Involved, any Work InvolvedExisting or prospective Work (a) reflected in any notice, proposal or claim, or (b) reflected in changes ordered or in process, or (c) affected by Delay.


APPENDIX II

SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS


DTMB Facilities and Business Services Administration Security Clearance Request

Contractor Instructions

Failure to comply with the above procedure will result in the individual(s) being delayed and may be cause for denying access to DTMB facilities. DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET The Work comprising this Project will be performed at a site of the Department of Technology Management and Budget. The Contractor must comply with all rules and regulations pertaining to such sites and must conform to the following rules: 1. The Contractor must provide a competent Superintendent satisfactory to the Department of Technology Management and Budget

on the work site at all times during working hours with full authority to act for him. It must be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish the Department of Technology Management and Budget with the name, address and telephone number of the responsible person to contact for Emergency during after hour, weekend and holiday periods.

2. Access to and egress from the site must be via routes specifically designated by the Department of Technology Management and

Budget authorized representative. 3. All work will be coordinated so as to minimally interfere with the normal function of the boating access site which will be open and

operational between the spring opening and fall closing. Specifically, 4. Areas on the site for employee parking, tool boxes, material lay down, etc., must be assigned by the Department of Technology

Management and Budget. All firearms, weapons, alcoholic beverages, or explosives must be removed from vehicles before entering the site.

5. Heavy equipment such as bulldozers and power shovels must be locked or immobilized in an acceptable manner when not in use.

No tools, small pipe, copper or wire must remain on the site overnight, unless acceptably locked inside shanties or tool chests. There will be no exchange, loaning or borrowing of tools, equipment or manpower between the Department of Technology Management and Budget and the Contractor.

6. The Contractor must comply with the special condition requirements of the Department of Technology Management and Budget.


APPENDIX III

SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES


SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR CONTRACTORS ON DTMB OWNED AND MANAGED PROPERTIES

1. Comply with Part 91, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control of the Natural Resources and Environmental Protection

Act 1994 PA 451, as amended. 2. Contact the DTMB, FBSA, Design and Construction Division to discuss the implementation of soil erosion and

sedimentation control (SESC) on the Project. Phone (517) 284-7911; FAX (517) 284-7971. 3. Following the award of a contract, the Contractor will be required to prepare and issue for approval an SESC

Implementation Plan, which indicates the Contractor’s intended implementation of SESC on the project including a schedule and sequence. The Environmental Health and Safety Section, upon approval of the implementation plan, will issue to the Contractor an “Authorization to Proceed with Earth Change” document, which is to be posted at the job site. This document is issued in lieu of a permit from the county. Earthwork shall not begin prior to the issuance of this Authorization. Upon receipt of the Authorization document, the Contractor may begin earth change activities.

4. See below the “Checklist for Contractor’s SESC Implementation Plan” for details of the required information necessary for the Contractor to create the SESC Implementation Plan. The intent of this plan is to ensure that the Contractor has reviewed and understands the SESC provisions within the plans and specifications.

5. CHECKLIST FOR CONTRACTOR’S SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL IMPLEMENTATION PLAN (For projects that include earth changes or disturb existing vegetation):

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET

FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION DIVISION SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PROGRAM

P.O. Box 30026, Lansing, Michigan 48909

PROJECT TITLE: GENERAL SERVICES BUILDING – RESTROOM RENOVATION AND ACU 9&10 REPLACEMENT

PROJECT LOCATION: DIMONDALE, MI PROJECT FILE NUMBER: 071/13011.SMD INDEX NUMBER: 44208

Prior to the start of earthwork, the Contractor must submit a Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control (SESC) Implementation Plan to the Michigan Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Program. The intent of this plan is to ensure that the Contractor has reviewed and understands the SESC provisions within the plans and specifications. The following checklist will provide Contractors with assistance in creating the SESC Implementation Plan. The SESC Implementation Plan must include: 1. A written plan or letter demonstrating:

The Contractor’s means and methods for the implementation of SESC provisions included within the plans and specifications and compliance with the provisions of Part 91 of PA 451 of 1994, as amended.

The Contractor’s plan for dust control. The Contractor’s plan for inspection and maintenance of temporary SESCs.

2. A map, location plan, drawing, or amended copy of the Project SESC or grading plan showing:

The locations of any stockpiles of soil associated with the Project The temporary SESC controls associated with stockpiles of soil The Contractor’s suggested or proposed additions or relocations of any temporary or permanent SESCs.

associated with the Project plans and specifications (subject to approval by Engineer and DTMB) Location of site entrances, exits and vehicle routes Location of site superintendent’s/project manager’s site trailer or office (for SESC Inspector check-in)

3. A schedule for the installation and removal of temporary controls and the installation of permanent soil erosion and

sedimentation controls in relation to the overall construction schedule. Submit the above items to the above address. Upon approval of the Contractor’s plan, an “Authorization to Proceed with Earth Change” will be issued by DTMB, Design and Construction Division.


DEMOLITION/REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES

Furnish all equipment, materials, labor and services necessary to complete all demolition required in connection with the existing systems, in order to permit the installation of new Work. The goal of the Owner is to generate the least amount of waste or debris possible. However, inevitable waste and debris that are generated shall be reused, salvaged, or recycled, and disposal in landfills shall be minimized to the extent economically feasible. The Contractor will be required to prepare waste management plan for the collection, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of the waste generated at the construction site for the Owner’s review and approval. The Contractor will be required to produce waste management progress reports. 1. Locations: Notations are made in various places on the Drawings to call attention to demolition which is required; however, these

Drawings are not intended to show each and every item to be removed. The Contractor and the Subcontractors for the various trades must remove the materials related to their respective trades as required to permit the construction of the new Work as shown.

2. Permits: The Contractor must secure from the appropriate agencies all required permits necessary for proper execution of the

work before starting work on the project site. All fees for securing the permits must be paid by the Contractor, including all inspection costs which may be legally assessed by the Bureau of Construction Codes in accordance with the authority granted under the Public Act 1980 PA 371, as amended.

3. Waste Management Plan: The management plan must address waste source identification and separation, returns, reuse and

salvage, recycling, landfill options, alternatives to landfilling, materials handling procedures and transportation. 4. Preparation: Protect all existing Work that is to remain and restore in an approved manner any such Work that becomes damaged.

4.1 Rubbish and debris resulting from the Work must be removed immediately from the site by the Contractor. However, any recyclable materials must be recycled; the Contractor will be required to use alternatives to landfills for waste disposal such as reuse or recycle of asphalt, bricks, concrete, masonry, plastics, paint, glass, carpet, metals, wood, drywall, insulation and any other waste materials to the extent practical.

5. Coordination: Demolition work, in connection with any new unit of Work, must not be commenced until all new materials required

for completion of that new item of Work are at hand. 6. Waste Management Plan Progress Reports: Submit an updated report with the payment requests. The progress reports shall

include: a. The amount of waste sent to a landfill, tipping fees paid and the total disposal cost. Include supporting documents such as

manifests, weight tickets, receipts and/or invoices. b. Records for each material recycled/reused/salvaged from the project including the amount, date removed from the job site,

final destination, transportation cost, recycled materials and the net cost/ savings. c. Breakdown of waste by type generated to date. d. Recycling/salvage/landfill rates. e. Percent of waste recycled/salvaged to date.


APPENDIX IV

REQUIRED PROJECT SIGN FOR PROJECTS COSTING IN EXCESS OF $500,000

NOT REQUIRED


APPENDIX V

PREVAILING WAGE RATES

State of Michigan [email protected] Official Request #: 1434 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: General Services Building - HVAC Upgrades Project Number: File# 071/13011.SMD - Index# 44208

Eaton County Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 1 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================

Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer MLDC $40.25 $53.64 $67.03 H H H X X X X D Y 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday, 10/1/2014 must be consecutive calendar days

Asbestos & Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler Asbestos and Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler AS207 $40.25 $53.58 $66.90 H H H X X X X D Y 10/1/2014 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday,

Boilermaker Boilermaker BO169 $54.70 $81.08 $107.45 H H H H H H H D Y 8/14/2009 Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $40.31 $59.49 $78.67 2nd 6 months $41.45 $61.21 $80.95 3rd 6 months $42.57 $62.88 $83.19 4th 6 months $43.69 $64.57 $85.43 5th 6 months $44.81 $66.24 $87.67 6th 6 months $49.53 $73.40 $97.26 7th 6 months $49.32 $73.01 $96.69 8th 6 months $51.58 $76.40 $101.21

Official Request #: 1434 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: DTMB Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: General Services Building - HVAC Upgrades on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: File# 071/13011.SMD - Index# 44208 prescribed in a contract. County: Eaton Page 1 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 2 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================

Bricklayer Brick, stone, artificial, cement masonry, pointing, caulking BR9-31 $44.22 $62.58 $80.94 H H H H H H H D Y & cleaning 3/8/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $33.16 $45.99 $58.82 750-1,499 hours $34.55 $48.08 $61.60 1,500-2,249 hours $35.93 $50.14 $64.36 2,250-2,999 hours $37.31 $52.22 $67.12 3,000-3,749 hours $38.69 $54.28 $69.88 3,750-4,499 hours $40.07 $56.36 $72.64 4,500 - 5,249 hours $41.46 $58.44 $75.42 5,250 - 6,000 hours $42.84 $60.51 $78.18

Carpenter Floor layer CA1004FL $37.71 $48.16 $58.60 X X H H H H H D Y 9/16/2013 Apprentice Rates: 1st Year $29.33 $35.58 $41.84 2nd Year $31.44 $38.75 $46.06 3rd Year $33.53 $41.88 $50.24 4th Year $34.58 $43.46 $52.34

Carpenter CA1004L $41.17 $53.36 $65.54 X X H H H H H D Y 10/1/2013 Apprentice Rates: 1st Year $31.42 $38.73 $46.04 2nd Year $33.86 $42.39 $50.92 3rd Year $36.30 $46.05 $55.80 4th Year $37.51 $47.86 $58.22 Subdivision of county All Twps EXCEPT Bellevue, Kalamo, Vermontville, and Walton

Floor Layer CA-100FL $39.16 $50.08 $61.00 X X H H H H H D N 6/6/2014 Apprentice Rates: 1st year $30.42 $36.97 $43.52 2nd year $32.61 $40.26 $47.90 3rd year $34.79 $43.52 $52.26 4th year $35.88 $45.16 $54.44 Subdivision of county townships of Bellevue, Kalamo, Vermontville & Walton


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 3 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Carpenter CA-525 $37.95 $48.05 $58.14 X X H H H H H D N 6/9/2014 Apprentice Rates: 1st year $29.87 $35.92 $41.98 2nd year $31.89 $38.96 $46.02 3rd year $33.91 $41.98 $50.06 4th year $34.92 $43.50 $52.08 Subdivision of county the townships of Bellevue, Kalamo, Vermontvile & Walton only

Cement Mason Cement Mason PL16-7 $37.52 $49.84 $62.16 H H H H H H H D Y 10/23/2012 Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday or Saturday inclement weather make up days. Saturday hours for inclement weather make up shall be paid straight rate unless over 40 hours worked.

Apprentice Rates: 1st year $28.90 $36.91 $44.92 2nd year $31.36 $40.60 $49.84 3rd year $33.82 $44.29 $54.76

Drywall Drywall Taper and Finisher PT-845-DF $37.39 $49.64 $61.89 H H H H H H H D N 7/8/2014 Apprentice Rates: 0 - 1,000 hours $26.37 $33.11 $39.85 1,001 - 2,000 hours $27.59 $34.94 $42.29 2,001 to 3,000 hours $29.55 $37.88 $46.21 3,001 to 4,000 hours $31.27 $40.46 $49.65 4,001 to 5,000 hours $33.71 $44.12 $54.53 5,001 to 6,000 hours $36.17 $47.81 $59.45



Electrician Journeyman Wireman EC-445-IW $41.98 $56.87 $71.75 H H H H H H H D N 4/30/2008 Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 hours $18.80 $25.37 $31.94 1,001-2,000 hours $20.27 $27.58 $34.88 2,001-2,750 hours $26.68 $34.86 $43.05 2,751-3,500 hours $28.16 $37.09 $46.01 3,501-4,250 hours $29.66 $39.33 $49.01 4,251-5,000 hours $31.15 $41.57 $51.99 5,001-5,750 hours $32.64 $43.81 $54.97 5,751-6,500 hours $34.12 $46.03 $57.93 6,501-7,250 hours $35.61 $48.26 $60.91 7,251-8,000 hours $37.11 $50.51 $63.91 Subdivision of county Townships of Sunfield, Vermontville, Kalamo, Bellevue, Walton, and Brookfield ONLY.

Sound & Communication Technician EC-445-SC $22.66 $30.76 $38.86 H H H H H H H D N 3/6/2007 Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $10.16 $14.42 $18.66 2nd 6 months $10.93 $15.57 $20.20 3rd 6 months $11.70 $16.72 $21.74 4th 6 months $12.48 $17.89 $23.30 5th 6 months $13.25 $19.05 $24.84 6th 6 months $14.02 $20.20 $26.38 Subdivision of county Townships of Sunfield, Vermontville, Kalamo, Bellevue, Walton and Brookfield ONLY.

Inside Wireman EC-665-IW $51.75 $68.20 $84.65 H H D H H H D D Y 9/13/2013 A four day schedule of ten hours a day is allowed Monday thru Friday.

Apprentice Rates: 0-1000 hours $29.63 $37.86 $46.07 1000-2000 hours $31.28 $40.31 $49.35 2000-3500 hours $32.93 $42.81 $52.68 3500-5000 hours $36.42 $47.12 $57.80 5000-6500 hours $38.07 $49.59 $61.10 6500-8000 hours $39.72 $52.06 $64.39 Subdivision of county Roxand, Oneida, Delta, Chester, Benton, Windsor, Carmel, Eaton, Eaton Rapids & Hamlin townships


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 5 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Sound and Communication Journeyman EC-665-SD $40.92 $54.31 $67.69 H H D H H H D D Y A four day schedule of ten hours a day is allowed Monday 9/13/2013 thru Friday.

Apprentice Rates: 1st period $23.84 $30.82 $37.80 2nd period $25.56 $33.25 $40.94 3rd period $27.28 $35.67 $44.05 4th period $28.98 $38.07 $47.14 5th period $30.87 $40.66 $50.44 6th period $32.41 $42.89 $53.37 Subdivision of county Roxand, Oneida, Delta, Chester, Benton, Windsor, Carmel, Eaton, Eaton Rapids and Hamlin townships

Lineman/Technician outside utility and commercial power EC-876 $47.05 $68.11 $89.17 H H H H H H H D Y and high voltage pipe type cable work and electrical 11/18/2009 underground. Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday makeup or Tuesday-Friday with Monday makeup.

Apprentice Rates: 1st period $30.20 $42.69 $55.26 2nd period $32.32 $46.02 $59.70 3rd period $34.42 $49.16 $63.90 4th period $36.53 $52.33 $68.12 5th period $38.63 $55.47 $72.32 6th period $40.74 $58.64 $76.54 7th period $42.84 $61.79 $80.74

Elevator Constructor Elevator Constructor Mechanic EL-85 $70.77 $116.32 D D D D D D D D Y 4/8/2013 Apprentice Rates: 1st year $50.27 $75.32 2nd year $54.83 $84.44 3rd year $57.10 $88.98 4th year $61.66 $98.10



Glazier Glazier GL-826 $43.53 $58.26 $72.98 H H H H H H H D Y 4 tens allowed on consecutive days 7/16/2014

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $31.04 $39.87 $48.71 2nd 6 months $32.60 $42.17 $51.74 3rd 6 months $34.17 $44.48 $54.79 4th 6 months $35.73 $46.78 $57.82 5th 6 months $37.28 $49.06 $60.84 6th 6 months $38.84 $51.35 $63.87 7th 6 months $40.40 $53.65 $66.90 8th 6 months $41.97 $55.96 $69.95

Heat and Frost Insulator Spray Insulation AS25S $20.14 $29.14 H H H H H H H H N 3/5/2007

Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker AS47 $44.40 $58.76 $73.12 H H H H H H H D Y 4 ten hour work days shall be either Monday thru Thursday 3/11/2013 or Tuesday thru Friday

Apprentice Rates: 1st year $25.78 $32.96 $40.14 2nd year $29.50 $38.11 $46.73 3rd year $33.22 $43.27 $53.32 4th year $36.95 $48.44 $59.93 5th year $40.68 $53.61 $66.53

Ironworker Pre-engineered Metal Work IR-25-PE-Z2 $43.02 $52.70 $62.37 X X H X X X X D Y 6/3/2014 Apprentice Rates: 1st Year $26.11 $31.58 $37.06 3rd 6 month period $28.23 $34.46 $40.68 4th 6 month period $30.36 $37.35 $44.33 5th 6 month period $32.48 $40.21 $47.95 6th 6 month period $34.61 $43.10 $51.59


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 7 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Fence, Sound Barrier & Guardrail erection/installation and IR-340-F2 $30.20 $40.45 $50.69 X X H X X X H D Y Exterior Signage work 8/13/2014 Four ten hour work days may be worked during Monday- Saturday.

Apprentice Rates: 60% Level $20.64 $26.79 $32.93 65% Level $21.77 $28.43 $35.09 70% Level $22.90 $30.07 $37.24 75% Level $24.02 $31.71 $39.39 80% Level $25.14 $33.33 $41.53 85% Level $26.27 $34.98 $43.69

Reinforcing: any work in connection with field fabrication, IR-340-Ref $45.05 $55.39 $65.73 H H H H H H H D Y post tensioning, prestressing of handling by power, rigging, 9/17/2014 crane signaling, crane assembly and dismantle, racking, sorting, cutting, bending, hoisting, placing, burning, welding, use of tie gun, and tying of all materials used to reinforce concrete construction. Realigning of reinforcing steel, wire mesh and placing of steel dowels, as well as refastening and resetting same while concrete is being poured. The handling and placing of j or jack bar on slip form construction. The placing of all clips, bolts, and steel rods and wire fabricator mesh pertaining to gunite construction. Drilling holes in concrete for dowels used to reinforce a concrete slab, beam or wall and the use of a chemical anchoring system (such as epoxy) to secure dowels. The use of a non-metallic carbon fiber or polymer typically used to reinforce concrete. Some brand names are NEFMAC, leadline or Tokyo rope.

Apprentice Rates: Registered 1st year $27.16 $33.31 $39.46 Registered 2nd year $28.21 $34.88 $41.56 Registered 3rd year $33.80 $42.05 $50.29

Rigging, heavy machinery moving and related tasks IR-340-RIG $37.43 $47.43 $57.43 X X X X X X X D Y 4/4/2013 Apprentice Rates: 1st year $22.50 $27.31 $32.11 2nd year $25.61 $33.31 $40.11 3rd year $30.59 $40.17 $48.65 4th year $32.67 $43.52 $53.11


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 8 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Structural and Finish work: all work related to the IR-340-STR $45.05 $55.39 $65.73 H H H H H H H D Y fabrication, erection & construction of all iron, steel, 9/17/2014 precast and reinforced concrete structures; bolting, decking, siding, glazing and curtain wall, misc steel stairways, handrails; rigging, signaling, loading, unloading, sorting and stacking of all material. The framing and erection or dismantling of all cranes, travelers and derricks. Field & job fabrication cutting, bending, drilling, welding & burning with acetylene torch or electric device; operation of man lifts or equipment to perform work; misc and ornamental iron and metal, including lockers, jail doors, bunks, iron doors, guardhouses, grating, racks, platforms and uni-strut supports; aligning or leveling or surveying in connection with steel or machinery erection. All demolition and dismantling or iron, steel, precast & reinforced concrete structures.

Apprentice Rates: 1st Year Registered $27.16 $33.31 $39.46 2nd Year Registered $28.21 $34.88 $41.56 3rd Year Registered $33.80 $42.05 $50.29 4th Year Registered $35.90 $45.19 $54.49

Laborer Journeyperson - building and heavy construction craft L499L $34.82 $45.79 $56.76 X X H H H H H D Y laborer, portable concrete mixer operator, air, electric or 6/3/2014 gasoline tool operator, hot dope carrier, tar kettle tender, gasoline vibrators, concrete gas buggies, concrete saw, signal person and top person on sewer, caisson construction (open cut work), concrete shoveler, car pusher, and bottom person (on sewer work). Demolition laborer, 3" pumps & below, jobsite clean-up, deep cleaning, jackhammer operators, burner, crock layer, caisson worker, tunnel mucker and tunnel miner, welder, mason tender, mortar mixer, scaffold builder, forklift operator (masonry only), helper and tender on work customarily performed by laborers and all laborers working for masonry contractors and plasterer tenders.

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 hours $29.33 $37.56 $45.78 1,001-2,000 hours $30.43 $39.20 $47.98 2,001-3,000 hours $31.53 $40.86 $50.18 3,001-4,000 hours $33.72 $44.14 $54.56

Ground Burner L499LG $35.32 $46.54 $57.76 X X H H H H H D Y 6/3/2014

High Burner L499LH $35.82 $47.29 $58.76 X X H H H H H D Y 6/3/2014



Laborer - Hazardous Class A Laborer - performing work in conjunction with site LHAZ-Z6-A $34.42 $48.70 $62.97 H H H H H H H D Y preparation and other preliminary work prior to actual 11/1/2013 removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances not requiring use of personal protective equipment required by state or federal regulations; or a laborer performing work in conjunction with the removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when use of personal protective equipment level "D" is required.

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $28.96 $40.51 $52.05 1,001-2,000 work hours $30.05 $42.14 $54.23 2,001-3,000 work hours $31.14 $43.78 $56.41 3,001-4,000 work hours $33.33 $47.06 $60.79

Class B Laborer - performing work in conjunction with the LHAZ-Z6-B $35.42 $50.20 $64.97 H H H H H H H D Y removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste 11/1/2013 substances when the use of personal protective equipment levels "A", "B" or "C" is required.


Laborer Underground - Tunnel, Shaft & Caisson Class I - Tunnel, shaft and caisson laborer, dump man, LAUCT-Z2-1 $35.67 $47.07 $58.47 X X X X X X X D Y shanty man, hog house tender, testing man (on gas), and 9/9/2013 watchman.



Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 10 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class II - Manhole, headwall, catch basin builder, bricklayer LAUCT-Z2-2 $35.76 $47.21 $58.65 X X X X X X X D Y tender, mortar man, material mixer, fence erector, and 9/9/2013 guard rail builder


Class III - Air tool operator (jack hammer man, bush LAUCT-Z2-3 $35.86 $47.36 $58.85 X X X X X X X D Y hammer man and grinding man), first bottom man, second 9/9/2013 bottom man, cage tender, car pusher, carrier man, concrete man, concrete form man, concrete repair man, cement invert laborer, cement finisher, concrete shoveler, conveyor man, floor man, gasoline and electric tool operator, gunnite man, grout operator, welder, heading dinky man, inside lock tender, pea gravel operator, pump man, outside lock tender, scaffold man, top signal man, switch man, track man, tugger man, utility man, vibrator man, winch operator, pipe jacking man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.).


Class IV - Tunnel, shaft and caisson mucker, bracer man, LAUCT-Z2-4 $36.02 $47.60 $59.17 X X X X X X X D Y liner plate man, long haul dinky driver and well point man. 9/9/2013


Class V - Tunnel, shaft and caisson miner, drill runner, LAUCT-Z2-5 $36.28 $47.99 $59.69 X X X X X X X D Y keyboard operator, power knife operator, reinforced steel 9/9/2013 or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars)

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $30.98 $40.04 $49.09 1,001-2,000 work hours $32.04 $41.63 $51.21 2,001-3,000 work hours $33.10 $43.22 $53.33 3,001-4,000 work hours $35.22 $46.40 $57.57 Official Request #: 1434 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: DTMB Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: General Services Building - HVAC Upgrades on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: File# 071/13011.SMD - Index# 44208 prescribed in a contract. County: Eaton Page 10 of 27


Class VI - Dynamite man and powder man. LAUCT-Z2-6 $36.59 $48.45 $60.31 X X X X X X X D Y 9/9/2013 Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $31.21 $40.38 $49.55 1,001-2,000 work hours $32.28 $41.99 $51.69 2,001-3,000 work hours $33.36 $43.61 $53.85 3,001-4,000 work hours $35.51 $46.84 $58.15

Class VII - Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, LAUCT-Z2-7 $28.86 $36.86 $44.85 X X X X X X X D Y cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of 9/9/2013 property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes and flagstones.


Landscape Laborer Landscape Specialist includes air, gas, and diesel LLAN-Z2-A $27.85 $38.49 $49.12 X X H X X X H D Y equipment operator, skidsteer (or equivalent), lawn 6/26/2014 sprinkler installer on landscaping work where seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintenance of landscape projects occurs. Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.

Skilled Landscape Laborer: small power tool operator, LLAN-Z2-B $23.65 $31.06 $38.47 X X H X X X H D Y lawn sprinkler installers' tender, material mover, truck 6/26/2014 driver on when seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintaining of landscape projects occurs Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.



Operating Engineer Class C- Regular equipment operator, crane, stiff leg EN-324-BH2C $49.55 $63.42 $77.29 H H H H H H H D Y derrick, scraper dozer, grader, front end loader, hoist, job 8/5/2014 mechanic, head grease man, concrete pump truck and hydro excavators Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Apprentice Rates: 0 - 999 hours $40.33 $50.04 $59.75 1,000 - 1,999 hours $41.71 $52.11 $62.51 2,000 - 2,999 hours $43.10 $54.19 $65.29 3,000 - 3,999 hours $44.49 $56.28 $68.07 4,000 - 4,999 hours $45.88 $58.37 $70.85 5,000 - 5,999 hours $47.26 $60.43 $73.61

Class D- Air tugger (single drum), material hoist, boiler EN-324-BH2D $44.75 $56.22 $67.69 H H H H H H H D Y operator, sweeping machine, winch truck, Bob Cat and 8/5/2014 similar equipment, elevators (when operated by an operating engineer), and fork truck over 20' lift Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class E- Pump 6" or over, well points, freeze systems, EN-324-BH2E $44.15 $55.32 $66.49 H H H H H H H D Y boom truck (non-swinging), end dumps and laser/power 8/5/2014 screed, concrete wire saw 20 h.p. and over and brokk concrete breaker Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class F- Air compressor, welder, generators, conveyors, EN-324-BH2F $41.70 $51.65 $61.59 H H H H H H H D Y pumps under 6", Grease man, and fork truck 20' or less lift 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather,


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 13 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class G- Oiler, fireman and heater operator EN-324-BH2G $40.00 $49.10 $58.19 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 220' or longer EN-OSA $50.90 $65.45 $79.99 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 300' or longer EN-OSA3 $52.40 $67.70 $82.99 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 400' or longer EN-OSA4 $53.90 $69.95 $85.99 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class B- Crane Operator with main boom and jib 140' or EN-OSB $50.65 $65.07 $79.49 H H H H H H H D Y longer, tower cranes, gantry crane, whirley derrick 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Operating Engineer - DIVER Diver/Wet Tender/Tender/Rov Pilot/Rov Tender GLF D $52.80 $79.20 $105.60 H H H H H H H D N 4/2/2014

Operating Engineer - Marine Construction Diver/Wet Tender, Engineer (hydraulic dredge) GLF-1 $65.00 $84.85 $104.70 X X H H H H H D Y 2/12/2014 Holiday pay= $124.55 per hour, wages & fringes

Subdivision of county all Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Official Request #: 1434 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: DTMB Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: General Services Building - HVAC Upgrades on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: File# 071/13011.SMD - Index# 44208 prescribed in a contract. County: Statewide Page 13 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 14 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Crane/Backhoe Operator, 70 ton or over Tug Operator, GLF-2 $63.50 $82.60 $101.70 X X H H H H H D Y Mechanic/Welder, Assistant Engineer (hydraulic dredge), 2/12/2014 Leverman (hydraulic dredge), Diver Tender Holiday pay = $120.80 per hour, wages & fringes

Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Friction, Lattice Boom or Crane License Certification GLF-2B $64.50 $84.10 $103.70 X X H H H H H D Y 2/12/2014 Holiday pay = $123.30

Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands, therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman, Maintenance of GLF-3 $59.30 $76.30 $93.30 X X H H H H H D Y Crane (over 50 ton capacity) or Backhoe (115,000 lbs or 2/12/2014 more), Tug/Launch Operator, Loader, Dozer on Barge, Deck Machinery Holiday pay = $110.30 per hour, wages & fringes


Deck Equipment Operator, (Machineryman/Fireman), (4 GLF-4 $53.60 $67.75 $81.90 X X H H H H H D Y equipment units or more), Off Road Trucks, Deck Hand, 2/12/2014 Tug Engineer, & Crane Maintenance 50 ton capacity and under or Backhoe 115,000 lbs or less, Assistant Tug Operator Holiday pay = $96.05 per hour, wages & fringes


Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Class I Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWCI-Z2A $50.13 $65.29 $80.45 H H H H H H H D Y pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $40.44 $51.06 $61.67 2nd 6 months $41.96 $53.34 $64.71 3rd 6 months $43.48 $55.62 $67.75 4th 6 months $44.98 $57.87 $70.75 5th 6 months $46.50 $60.15 $73.79 6th 6 months $48.02 $62.43 $76.83


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 15 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWCI-Z2B $49.18 $63.87 $78.55 H H H H H H H D Y SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.


Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical EN-324-HWCI-Z2D $47.88 $61.92 $75.95 H H H H H H H D Y splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.


Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, EN-324-HWCI-Z2DCL $47.63 $61.54 $75.45 H H H H H H H D Y glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.




Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Class II Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWCII-Z2A $45.73 $58.69 $71.65 H H H H H H H D Y pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWCII-Z2B $44.79 $57.28 $69.77 H H H H H H H D Y SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical EN-324-HWCII-Z2D $43.49 $55.33 $67.17 H H H H H H H D Y splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, EN-324-HWCII-Z2DCL $43.24 $54.96 $66.67 H H H H H H H D Y glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Crane w/ Boom & Jib leads 140' or longer Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HW140-Z2A $52.78 $69.27 $85.75 H H H H H H H D Y pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 17 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HW140-Z2B $51.72 $67.68 $83.63 H H H H H H H D Y SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical EN-324-HW140-Z2D $50.53 $65.89 $81.25 H H H H H H H D Y splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, EN-324-HW140-Z2DCL $50.28 $65.52 $80.75 H H H H H H H D Y glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Crane w/ Boom & Jib leads 220' or longer Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HW220-Z2A $53.08 $69.72 $86.35 H H H H H H H D Y pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HW220-Z2B $52.04 $68.16 $84.27 H H H H H H H D Y SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical EN-324-HW220-Z2D $50.83 $66.34 $81.85 H H H H H H H D Y splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.



Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, EN-324-HW220-Z2DCL $50.58 $65.97 $81.35 H H H H H H H D Y glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Regular Crane, Job Mechanic, Dragline Operator, Boom Truck Operator, Power Shovel Operator and Concrete Pump with boom Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWRC-Z2A $51.10 $66.75 $82.39 H H H H H H H D Y pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Regular Crane, Job Mechanic, Dragline Operator, Boom Truck Operator, Power Shovel Operator and Concrete Pump with Boom Operator Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWRC-Z2B $50.15 $65.32 $80.49 H H H H H H H D Y SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical EN-324-HWRC-Z2D $48.85 $63.37 $77.89 H H H H H H H D Y splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, EN-324-HWRC-Z2DCL $48.60 $63.00 $77.39 H H H H H H H D Y glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats. 1/23/2012 Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.



Operating Engineer Steel Work Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 220' or longerFour 10 EN-324-SWW1220 $51.25 $65.97 $80.69 H H H H H H H D Y hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday- 8/5/2014 Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 300' or longer EN-324-SWW1300 $52.75 $68.22 $83.69 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 400' or longer EN-324-SWW1400 $54.25 $70.47 $86.69 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class B- Crane Operator with main boom and jib 140' or EN-324-SWW1B $51.00 $65.60 $80.19 H H H H H H H D Y longer, tower cranes, gantry crane, whirley derrick 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class C- Regular equipment operator, crane, dozer, grader, EN-324-SWW1C $50.50 $64.85 $79.19 H H H H H H H D Y loader, hoist, straddle wagon, job mechanic & hydro 8/5/2014 excavator Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Apprentice Rates: 0 - 999 hours $40.99 $51.03 $61.07 1,000 - 1,999 hours $42.43 $53.19 $63.95 2,000 - 2,999 hours $43.86 $55.33 $66.81 3,000 - 3,999 hours $45.30 $57.49 $69.69 4,000 - 4,999 hours $46.73 $59.64 $72.55 5,000 - 5,999 hours $48.17 $61.80 $75.43


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 20 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class D- Air tugger (single drum), material hoist, pump 6" EN-324-SWW1D $45.40 $57.20 $68.99 H H H H H H H D Y or over, elevators (when operated by an operating 8/5/2014 engineer) and brokk concrete breaker Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class E- Air compressor, welder, generators and EN-324-SWW1E $43.75 $54.72 $65.69 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014

Class F- Oiler and Fireman EN-324-SWW1F $41.15 $50.82 $60.49 H H H H H H H D Y 8/5/2014 Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Operating Engineer Underground Class I Equipment - Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, Batch EN-324A2-UC1 $48.63 $62.77 $76.90 H H H H H H H D Y Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Paver 2 drums or 9/13/2013 larger, Conveyor Loader Euclid type, Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, endloader, gradall, grader, hydro excavator, power shovel, roller asphalt, scraper self-propelled or tractor drawn, side boom tractor, slip form paver, slope paver, trencher over 8 ft. digging capacity, well drilling rig, concrete pump with boom operator

Apprentice Rates: 0-999 hours $38.70 $48.42 $58.14 1,000-1,999 hours $40.09 $50.50 $60.92 2,000-2,999 hours $41.48 $52.59 $63.70 3,000-3,999 hours $42.87 $54.68 $66.48 4,000-4,999 hours $44.26 $56.76 $69.26 5,000-5,999 hours $45.64 $58.83 $72.02

Class II Equipment - Boom Truck, Crusher, Hoist, Pump 6 EN-324A2-UC2 $43.74 $55.43 $67.12 H H H H H H H D Y inch discharge or larger, side boom tractor, Tractor (pneu- 9/13/2013 tired other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher 8 ft. digging capcity and smaller, Vac Truck


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 21 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class III Equipment - Air Compressors 600 cfm or larger, EN-324A2-UC3 $43.24 $54.68 $66.12 H H H H H H H D Y Air Compressors 2 or more less than 600 dfm, Boom 9/13/2013 Truck non-swinging non-powered type boom, Concrete Breaker self-propelled or truck mounted, Concrete paver 1 drum 1/2 yd. or larger, Elevator other than passenger, Pump 4 inch to 6 inch discharge, pumpcrete machine, wagon drill, welding machine or generator 2 or more 300

Class IV Equipment - Boiler, Concrete Saw 40 hp or over, EN-324A2-UC4 $42.96 $54.26 $65.56 H H H H H H H D Y curing machine self propelled, end dumps, extend a boom 9/13/2013 forklift, farm tractor with attachment, finishing machine concrete, firemen, hydraulic pipe pushing machine, mulching equipment, oiler, pumps up to 4 inch discharge, roller other than asphalt, stump remover, sweeper wayne type, trencher, vibrating compaction equipment self propelled 6 ft. wide or over, water wagon.

Painter Painter PT-845-BR $33.74 $44.69 $55.63 H H H H H H H D Y 7/17/2014 A 4-10s workweek allowed Monday-Thursday.

Apprentice Rates: 0-1000 hours $23.89 $29.91 $35.93 1001-2000 hours $24.98 $31.55 $38.11 2001-3000 hours $26.74 $34.19 $41.63 3001-4000 hours $28.27 $36.48 $44.69 4001-5000 hours $30.46 $39.77 $49.07 5001-6000 hours $32.65 $43.05 $53.45

Pipe and Manhole Rehab General Laborer for rehab work or normal cleaning and TM247 $27.20 $36.70 H H H H H H H H N cctv work-top man, scaffold man, CCTV assistant, jetter- 10/15/2012 vac assistant

Tap cutter/CCTV Tech/Grout Equipment Operator: unit TM247-2 $31.70 $43.45 H H H H H H H H N driver and operator of CCTV; grouting equipment and tap 10/15/2012 cutting equipment

CCTV Technician/Combo Unit Operator: unit driver and TM247-3 $30.45 $41.57 H H H H H H H H N operator of cctv unit or combo unit in connection with 10/15/2012 normal cleaning and televising work


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 22 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Boiler Operator: unit driver and operator of steam/water TM247-4 $32.20 $44.20 H H H H H H H H N heater units and all ancillary equipment associated 10/15/2012

Combo Unit driver & Jetter-Vac Operator TM247-5 $32.20 $44.20 H H H H H H H H N 10/15/2012

Pipe Bursting & Slip-lining Equipment Operator TM247-6 $33.20 $45.70 H H H H H H H H N 10/15/2012

Plasterer Plasterer PL16-2 $36.92 $49.39 $61.86 H H H H H H H D N 6/1/2010 Apprentice Rates: 1st year $28.19 $36.30 $44.40 2nd year $30.68 $40.03 $49.38 3rd year $33.18 $43.78 $54.38

Plumber & Pipefitter Plumber & Pipefitter PL-333-RI $51.02 $76.33 $101.64 H H H H H H H D Y Four 10s allowed Monday thru Thursday. Friday not a 12/29/2009 makeup, considered OT, paid @ time & one-half.

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $32.97 $49.26 $65.54 2nd 6 months $34.61 $51.72 $68.82 3rd 6 months $36.25 $54.18 $72.10 4th 6 months $37.89 $56.64 $75.38 5th 6 months $39.53 $59.10 $78.66 6th 6 months $41.17 $61.56 $81.94 7th 6 months $42.82 $64.03 $85.24 8th 6 months $44.46 $66.49 $88.52 9th 6 months $46.10 $68.95 $91.80 10th 6 months $47.74 $71.41 $95.08 Subdivision of county The Townships of Delta, Oneida, Roxand, Sunfield and Windsor ONLY.


Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 10/8/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 1/6/2015 Page 23 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Plumber & Pipefitter PL-333-RIII $51.02 $76.33 $101.64 H H H H H H H D Y Four 10s allowed Monday thru Thursday. Friday not a 12/29/2009 makeup, considered OT, paid @ time & one-half.

Apprentice Rates: 1st Period $32.97 $49.26 $65.54 2nd Period $34.61 $51.72 $68.82 3rd Period $36.25 $54.18 $72.10 4th Period $37.89 $56.64 $75.38 5th Period $39.53 $59.10 $78.66 6th Period $41.17 $61.56 $81.94 7th Period $42.82 $64.03 $85.24 8th Period $44.46 $66.49 $88.52 9th Period $46.10 $68.95 $91.80 10th Period $47.74 $71.41 $95.08 Subdivision of county The Townships of Vermontville, Chester, Benton, Kalamo, Carme, Eaton, Eaton Rapids, Bellevue, Walton, Brookfield and Hamlin ONLY.

Roofer Commercial Roofer RO-70-Z2 $40.85 $53.29 $65.73 H H H X H H H D Y 4 consecutive tens allowed M-TH 9/17/2014

Apprentice Rates: 1st Class $26.19 $31.76 $37.32 2nd Class $28.09 $34.55 $41.01 3rd Class $30.13 $37.58 $45.03 4th Class $32.04 $40.42 $48.80 5th Class $33.96 $43.25 $52.53 6th Class $35.86 $46.04 $56.22

Sewer Relining Class I-Operator of audio visual CCTV system including SR-I $42.26 $57.09 $71.91 H H H H H H H D N remote in-ground cutter and other equipment used in 5/6/2014 conjunction with CCTV system.

Class II-Operator of hot water heaters and circulation SR-II $40.73 $54.79 $68.85 H H H H H H H D N system; water jetters; and vacuum and mechanical debris 5/6/2014 removal systems and those assisting.



Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker SHM-7-1 $47.42 $61.33 $75.24 H H H H D D D D Y 4 10s allowed as consecutive days, M-Th or T-F 9/25/2014

Apprentice Rates: First Year $25.29 $32.24 $39.20 Second Year $30.71 $39.06 $47.40 Third Year $39.07 $48.80 $58.54 Fourth Year $41.86 $52.99 $64.12

Sprinkler Fitter Sprinkler Fitter SP 669 $46.51 $61.99 $77.47 H H H H H H H D Y 9/17/2009 Apprentice Rates: Class 1 & 2 $23.44 $31.31 $39.17 Class 3 $29.35 $37.75 $46.15 Class 4 $30.93 $40.12 $49.31 Class 5 $35.50 $45.47 $55.45 Class 6 $37.07 $47.83 $58.59 Class 7 $38.65 $50.20 $61.75 Class 8 $40.22 $52.55 $64.89 Class 9 $41.79 $54.91 $68.03 Class 10 $43.36 $57.27 $71.17

Tile, Terrazzo and Mosiac Finisher BR9-31-TF $30.57 $39.66 $48.75 H H H H H H H D Y 3/7/2013 Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $24.21 $30.12 $36.03 750-1,499 hours $25.12 $31.49 $37.85 1,500-2,249 hours $26.03 $32.85 $39.67 2,250-2,999 hours $26.93 $34.20 $41.47 3,000-3,749 hours $27.84 $35.57 $43.29 3,750-4,499 hours $28.75 $36.93 $45.11

Setter BR9-31-TS $35.94 $46.71 $57.47 H H H H H H H D Y 3/7/2013 Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $28.40 $35.39 $42.39 750-1499 hours $29.48 $37.01 $44.55 1500-2249 hours $30.56 $38.63 $46.71 2250-2999 hours $31.63 $40.24 $48.85 3000-3749 hours $32.71 $41.86 $51.01 3750-4499 hours $33.79 $43.48 $53.17



Truck Driver of all trucks of 8 cubic yd capacity or over TM-RB2 $41.92 $37.85 H H H H H H H H Y 8/8/2013

of all trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or less (except dump TM-RB2A $41.82 $37.70 H H H H H H H H Y trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or over, tandem axle 8/8/2013 trucks, transit mix and semis, euclid type equipment, double bottoms and low boys)

on euclid type equipment TM-RB2B $41.35 $38.08 H H H H H H H H Y 8/8/2013

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class I Construction Laborer LAUC-Z3-1 $33.61 $43.93 $54.25 X X X X X X X D Y 9/9/2013 Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $29.08 $37.14 $45.19 1,001-2,000 work hours $29.98 $38.49 $46.99 2,001-3,000 work hours $30.89 $39.86 $48.81 3,001-4,000 work hours $32.70 $42.57 $52.43

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class II Mortar and material mixer, concrete form man, signal LAUC-Z3-2 $33.75 $44.14 $54.53 X X X X X X X D Y man, well point man, manhole, headwall and catch basin 9/9/2013 builder, guard rail builders, headwall, seawall, breakwall, dock builder and fence erector.




Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class III Air, gasoline and electric tool operator, vibrator operator, LAUC-Z3-3 $33.87 $44.32 $54.77 X X X X X X X D Y drillers, pump man, tar kettle operator, bracers, rodder, 9/9/2013 reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars, etc.), cement finisher, welder, pipe jacking and boring man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.), windlass and tugger man, and directional boring man.

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $29.27 $37.42 $45.57 1,001-2,000 work hous $30.19 $38.80 $47.41 2,001-3,000 work hours $31.11 $40.18 $49.25 3,001-4,000 work hours $32.95 $42.94 $52.93

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class IV Trench or excavating grade man. LAUC-Z3-4 $33.92 $44.40 $54.87 X X X X X X X D Y 9/9/2013 Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $29.31 $37.48 $45.65 1,001-2,000 work hours $30.23 $38.86 $47.49 2,001-3,000 work hours $31.15 $40.24 $49.33 3,001-4,000 work hours $33.00 $43.02 $53.03

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class V Pipe Layer LAUC-Z3-5 $34.06 $44.61 $55.15 X X X X X X X D Y 9/9/2013 Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $29.41 $37.64 $45.85 1,001-2,000 work hours $30.34 $39.03 $47.71 2,001-3,000 work hours $31.27 $40.42 $49.57 3,001-4,000 work hours $33.13 $43.22 $53.29

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VI Grouting man, top man assistant, audio visual television LAUC-Z3-6 $31.36 $40.56 $49.75 X X X X X X X D Y operations and all other operations in connection with 9/9/2013 closed circuit television inspection, pipe cleaning and pipe relining work and the installation & repair of water service pipe & appurtenances




Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VII Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, LAUC-Z3-7 $28.51 $36.28 $44.05 X X X X X X X D Y mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of 9/9/2013 property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes, flagstones etc.



13011.SMD Index No. 44208 Department of Technology ... · General Services Building – Restroom...

Documents

Transcript of 13011.SMD Index No. 44208 Department of Technology ... · General Services Building – Restroom...